Tac 32 ICON 32 Manual

Controller
Every attempt has been made to ensure that this documentation is as accurate and up-to-date as
possible. However, Vertical Express assumes no liability for consequences, directly or indirectly,
resulting from any error or omission. The material contained herein is subject to revision. Please report
any problems with this manual to Vertical Express, P.O. Box 2019, Memphis, Tennessee 38101.
Vertical Express • P.O. Box 2019 • Memphis, Tennessee 38101
©2020 Vertical Express. All rights reserved.

Published April 2020
First Edition
Printed in the United States of America
Manual Number: 88500 v.1.0

INSTALLATION SECTION
INSTALLATION SECTION
Installation Section Contents
Contents
Preliminary Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Prepare for Temporary Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Configure the UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Temporary Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Runbug Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Electronic Starter Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Mechanical Starter Set Up with ESP200 Overloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Pump Motor Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
I-2/I-3 Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Relief Pressure Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Low Pressure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Selector Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Mount the Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Hoistway Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Wireway and Conduit Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Typical Hoistway Conduit/Duct Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Typical Front Conduit/Duct Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Typical Rear Conduit/Duct Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Interlock Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Traveling Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Hoistway Entrance Frames and Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Door Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Selector Box Mounting and Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Formed Rail Selector Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
T-Rail Selector Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Twin Post Selector Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Tape Selector Bolt Kit for Crosshead Mount (200BWY001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Car Top Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Swing Return Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Machine Room Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Vertical Express Product Manual 1-1 88500 v.1.0

Contents Installation Section
This page
intentionally
left blank.
©Vertical Express 1-2 Printed in USA April 2020

Installation Section Preliminary Installation
Preliminary Installation
INSTALLATION
Install the following items. Refer to the Vertical Express Installation Manual (located
at: http://www.verticalxpress.com/component_manuals/Installation Manual), and
the installation instructions that ship with the equipment.
• Pit template (if provided), pit channel, and buffers
• Jack, jack follower guides (as required), rail brackets and rails
• Car sling and platform
• Power unit and controller
• Fluid line (jack line)
Prepare for Temporary Operation

1. Turn OFF, Lockout, and Tagout the mainline disconnect.
2. Pipe and install power from the mainline disconnect to the controller.
See Figure 2 on page 1-4.

• Conduit for the wires from the mainline disconnect must be installed on the

same side of the controller cabinet as the motor starter.
• The fourth wire ground from the disconnect is to be landed on the dedicated
ground bar of the controller, not the motor starter heatsink.
3. Verify that CON19, CON20, and CON21 are removed on the IOF Card. See
Figure 1.
CON19 CON20 CON21
Figure 1 - IOF Card Connectors

Preliminary Installation Installation Section
Prepare for Temporary Operation

(continued)
High Voltage Wire Routing

(straight down to the Low Voltage In
electronic motor or (from knockouts on this
contactor starter) side of the controller)
NOTE: If the THY-02 Card (6300ACA2)
High Voltage In obstructs the low voltage wiring,
(from knockouts in this move the card to the DIN rail.
corner of the controller)
Trades Access Terminal Strip
(through controller top panel)
HIGH VOLTAGE SIDE LOW VOLTAGE SIDE
Ground Bar
Low Voltage
Wire Routing
(as needed)
Mainline Disconnect Power

Connection to Controller UPS installed on the underside of the controller
(use the shipping bracket and screws to mount)
UPS Electrical Cords
Pass Through Knockout
Figure 2 - Power from Mainline Disconnect to the Controller

Installation Section Preliminary Installation
Installation
INSTALLATION
(continued) Configure the UPS
1. When on temporary operation, connect the following:
a. The AC receptacle cord from the IOF Card - CON18, pins 1, 2, and 3.
b. The AC plug from the IOF Card - CON18, pins 4, 5, and 6.

• The UPS should not be in the AC circuit during temporary operation. See

Figure 3.
• If battery lowering is not required for the job, no UPS will be provided.
• When battery lowering is not present, Manufacturing installs jumper wires
from CON18 pin 1 to pin 4, pin 2 to pin 5, and pin 3 to pin 6 on the IOF Card.
• The UPS may be mounted below the controller - Use the shipping bracket
and screws to hold the UPS in place, and wire the plug through a knock
out in the bottom of the controller.
Figure 3 - UPS Unit Connections
2. Use a temporary jumper to connect EPD1 and EPD2 (located in the Trades
Access Panel, on the top of the controller). See Figure 4.

The EPD1 and EPD2 jumper will be replaced by an auxiliary set of contacts in the dis-

connect to prevent the control system from operating on any form of alternate power
when the disconnect is in the OFF position.
EPD1 & EPD2

Jumpers
Figure 4 - EPD1/EPD2 Jumpers

Temporary Operation Installation Section
Temporary Operation
Only connect the approved thyssenkrupp pendant station (runbug, part number
9817323) for temporary operation. The pendant station connects directly to the
IOF Card (bottom left corner) at the connector “RUNBUG.”
Runbug Set Up • For Electronic Starters - Confirm that there are Manufacturing installed temporary
run jumpers between MUTS/USS1 and 134/MCC1. See Figure 5.
• For Across The Line Starters - See Figure 6 on page 1-7.
TR4 (WHT) 9:4 18:5

FROM XFMR1 OR UPS
AC2 AC2
(BLU) F-AC1SC AC2 EPEN
TR3 9:3 18:4
FROM XFMR1 OR UPS
AC1SC X1
SAFSP SAFCPU RUN/STOP
ON/OFF
KEYSWITCH 102
MACHINE-ROOM BYPASSED
EPD's
RUN/STOP
TR1 (ORG) 107
107
HOISTWAY BYPASSED
ENABLE
EPD's
NO JUMPER 115
DOWN UP
ON RUNBUG 115
CAR BYPASSED
EPD's
9A:2 9A:1
131 121 121
TR5 (BLK) 9:5 131
131
MOTOR
PROTECTION
134
MCC2 ADD WHEN

ON RUNBUG
EMS?
FAULT
9:1 MCC2 9 10
- - MC2
MCC2 - 11
MCC1
RUN INPUT
TR6 (RED/BLK) 9:6 MCC1 4
- - 12
DSS1
POWER
2 3
TR2 (WHT/BLK) 9:2 - -
MCE 1
SCG2 -
UP TO SPEED
INPUT x1 MCE 5 6
- -
REMOTE CPU
INSPECTION MCD
(RUNBUG) INPUT x1 MCD
CPU FAULT
RT 7 8
Note: COLOR CODING shown is for - -
G24
9817323 run button units; other brands MCF
INPUT x1 SOFT START
must be wired according to CON TR MCF
pin assignments. CPU ADD WHEN
MUTS ON RUNBUG
INPUT x1 MUTS
CPU USS1
UP SLOW
USS1
USS2
DSS1 DOWN SLOW
DSS2
TSRCPU
AC2
AC2
IOF AC2
Figure 5 - Temporary Operation Pendant Station (RUNBUG) Connection for Electronic Motor Starting

Installation Section Temporary Operation
Runbug Set Up
INSTALLATION
(continued) • For Across The Line Starters - Confirm that there are Manufacturing installed
temporary run jumpers between 134, MCC1 and USS1. See Figure 6.

• The EPEN relay is energized by input EPD2 from the Trades Access Panel.

• On runbug, the CPU Card operation/faults is irrelevant to Up and Down oper-
ation because the operation is dependent on 120VAC discrete feed to relays
and solenoids from the pendant station.
TR4 (WHT) 9:4 18:2 FROM XFMR1 OR UPS

AC2 AC2
F-AC1SC EPEN
TR3 (BLU) 9:3 AC2 18:3 FROM XFMR1 OR UPS
AC1SC X1
SAFSP SAFCPU
RUN/STOP
ON/OFF 102
KEYSWITCH MACHINE-ROOM BYPASSED
EPD's
RUN/STOP 107
TR1 (ORG) 107
HOISTWAY BYPASSED
ENABLE
EPD's
115
NO JUMPER 115
DOWN UP ON RUNBUG
CAR BYPASSED
EPD's
9A:2 9A:1 121
131 121
TR5 (BLK) 9:5 131
131
MOTOR
PROTECTION
134
MCC2 ADD WHEN

ON RUNBUG
9:1 MCC2
MCC2
MC2
MCC1
TR6 (RED/BLK) 9:6 MCC1
DSS1
MC1
(on Across the Line with

TR2 (WHT/BLK) 9:2 2 Contactors only).
SCG2 MCE MC2AUX MC1AUX
INPUT x1 MCE 13 14 13 14
REMOTE CPU
INSPECTION MCD
(RUNBUG) INPUT x1 21 22 21 22
MCD
CPU
RT MC2AUX MC1AUX
Note: COLOR CODING shown is for
G24
9817323 run button units; other brands MCF
must be wired according to CON TR INPUT x1 MCF
pin assignments.
CPU
ADD WHEN
MUTS ON RUNBUG
INPUT x1 MUTS
CPU USS1
USS1 UP SLOW
USS2
DSS1 DOWN SLOW
DSS2
TSRCPU
AC2
AC2
AC2
IOF
Figure 6 - Temporary Operation Pendant Station (RUNBUG) Connection for Across the Line Motor Starting

Runbug Set Up
(continued) 1. Remove the plug at CON16 on the IOF Card. See Figure 7.
CON16
Figure 7 - IOF Card (6300AHV001)
Initial power application occurs in the next step. If incorrect, the electronic starter
may be damaged.
2. View the nameplate sticker on the electronic starter to determine its voltage rating,
and view the power unit data tag for the motor voltage rating.
a. Compare these ratings to the known building voltage provided at the disconnect.
Before continuing, correct as required.

Most electronic starters are rated at 200-460VAC (and for special applications up to

575VAC), and should not be damaged by incorrect voltage from the disconnect that is
within this range. However, Electronic Starter #787AF14 is rated for 200-230VAC, and
application of 3 phase voltage above that rating could damage it.
b. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.
3. Use a volt meter on the AC mode, and confirm that the secondary output from XFMR1
is between 108VAC and 132VAC.
If the voltage is not correct, do not continue until this issue is resolved.
4. Turn OFF the mainline disconnect.
5. Install the plug at CON16 on the IOF Card.
6. Remove CON9A, located at the bottom left corner of the IOF Card. Be sure to save
CON9A as it will be reinstalled after temporary operation.

Runbug Set Up
INSTALLATION
(continued) 7. Install the RUNBUG plug at CON9 on the IOF Card. See Figure 8.
RUNBUG
Plug
Figure 8 - RUNBUG Plug at CON9 on the IOF Card
8. Fill the power unit fluid reservoir with the appropriate fluid for this job.
9. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.
10. Confirm that the AC LED is illuminated. See Figure 9.
AC LED
Figure 9 - Illuminated AC LED on IOF Card

Electronic Starter Setup

For Across the Line Motor Starting, see Mechanical Starter Set Up with ESP200 Overloads on page 1 - 11.
MOTOR STATUS
STOPPED
SCROLL UP
EXIT MENU
OR SAVE ENTER MENU
SCROLL DOWN
Electronic Starter Display

• The electronic starter displays MOTOR STATUS STOPPED when the system is normal.

Reset the starter if it reads otherwise and, before continuing, correct any problem indi-
cated on the display.
• The starter display reverts to MOTOR STATUS STOPPED after 5 minutes of inactivity.
1. Verify that the Starting Amps = the Motor Nameplate Amps x 3 (Mfg. default).
Optional: 2 x FLA = minimum setting, 4.5 x FLA = maximum setting.
2. From the MOTOR STATUS menu, press . The STATUS menu displays.
3. Press  twice to display the PARAMETERS menu.
4. From the PARAMETERS menu, press  once. STARTING AMPS displays.

5. Set the starting amps value equal to three times the nameplate FLA.
a. Press  once to access the value.
b. Press  or  to adjust the value of the flashing digit. Press  to move to the
next digit.
c. Press  to exit the starting amps parameter.
A prompt to ACCEPT or REJECT the change displays. Press  to accept or  to reject
and correct the parameter.

Electronic Starter Setup
INSTALLATION
(continued)
6. Press  once and OVERLOAD AMPS displays.
a. If the value is correct, skip to Step 8.
b. If the value is not correct, continue to Step 7.
7. Press  once to access the value.

a. Press  or  to adjust the value of the flashing digit.
b. Press  to move to the next digit.
8. Press  to exit to the PARAMETERS Menu.

A prompt to ACCEPT or REJECT the change appears. Press to accept, or  to
reject and correct the parameter.
Mechanical Starter Set Up with ESP200 Overloads

Overload relay current settings are preset by Manufacturing. The following initial
adjustment can also be used during temporary operation for jobs that trip overloads,
but the actual overload current will be set during final adjustment.
1. Use Table 1 below or Table 2 on page 1 - 12 to determine the overload relay cur-
rent setting based on the motor horsepower and voltage or nameplate amps.
2. Set the full load amps adjustment dial to the overload current setting from
Step 1. See Figure 10.
Full Load Amps

Adjustment Dial
Figure 10 - ESP200 Overload Adjustment
Motor Motor Voltage NEC Motor NP Wiring Overload

HP (50 or 60 Hz) Rated Amps Configuration Current Setting
200V/208V 46 50
7.5
230 40 Special, 43
200V/208V 58 See Wiring Diagrams 62
10
230 50 54
Table 1 - Overload Specifications For Single Phase Motors

Mechanical Starter Set Up with ESP200 Overloads

(continued)
Line or Phase Overload Line or Phase Overload

Motor Motor Voltage NEC Motor NP Motor Motor Voltage NEC Motor NP
Wiring Current Wiring Current
HP (50 or 60 Hz) Rated Amps HP (50 or 60 Hz) Rated Amps
Configuration Setting Configuration Setting
200V/208V 17.5 Line 25.0 200V/208V 92 Line 131.6
220V 15.9 Line 22.8 220V 84 Line 120.1
230V 15.2 Line 21.7 230V 80 Line 114.4
5 380V 9.2 Line 13.2 30 380V 48 Line 68.6
415V 8.4 Line 12.1 415V 44 Line 62.9
460V 7.6 Line 10.9 460V 40 Line 57.2
575V 6.1 Line 8.7 575V 32 Line 45.8
200V/208V 25 Line 35.8 200V/208V 120 Phase 99.1
220V 23 Line 32.9 220V 109 Phase 90.0
230V 22 Line 31.5 230V 104 Phase 85.9
7.5 380V 13 Line 18.6 40 380V 63 Line 90.1
415V 12 Line 17.2 415V 57 Line 81.5
460V 11 Line 15.7 460V 52 Line 74.4
575V 9 Line 12.9 575V 41 Line 58.6
200V/208V 32 Line 45.8 200V/208V 150 Phase 123.8
220V 29 Line 41.5 220V 136 Phase 112.3
230V 28 Line 40.0 230V 130 Phase 107.3
10 380V 17 Line 24.3 50 380V 79 Line 113.0
415V 15 Line 21.5 415V 72 Line 103.0
460V 14 Line 20.0 460V 65 Line 93.0
575V 11 Line 15.7 575V 52 Line 74.4
200V/208V 48 Line 68.6 200V/208V 177 Phase 146.0
220V 44 Line 62.9 220V 161 Phase 132.9
230V 42 Line 60.1 230V 154 Phase 127.1
15 380V 25 Line 35.8 60 380V 93 Line 133.0
415V 23 Line 32.9 415V 85 Line 121.6
460V 21 Line 30.0 460V 77 Line 110.1
575V 17 Line 24.3 575V 62 Line 88.7
200V/208V 62 Line 88.7 200V/208V 221 Phase 180.0
220V 56 Line 80.1 220V 201 Phase 166.0
230V 54 Line 77.2 230V 192 Phase 158.0
75
20 380V 33 Line 47.2 380V 116 Phase 95.8
415V 30 Line 42.9 415V 106 Phase 87.5
460V 27 Line 38.6 460V 96 Phase 79.3
575V 22 Line 31.5
200V/208V 78 Line 111.5
220V 71 Line 101.5
230V 68 Line 97.2
25
380V 41 Line 58.6
415V 37 Line 52.9
460V 34 Line 48.6
Table 2 - Overload Specifications For ESP 200 Overload Applications

Pump Motor Rotation
INSTALLATION
Swapping motor leads to correct motor rotation will result in a motor wiring
fault. Motor rotation is controlled through adjustments in the starter and
also the line input to the starter.
2. Momentarily press UP and SAFE on the temporary run box, and observe the
direction of the motor rotation (clockwise rotation is standard for Vertical Express
equipment when viewed from the shaft end).
ABC = Standard Dry (AP) units (CW rotation as viewed from the shaft end). The
motor is mounted to the left of the pump.
CBA = Standard Wet (EP) units (CCW rotation as viewed from the pump end).
– If the motor rotation is correct, continue to Step 5.
– If the rotation is incorrect, complete the appropriate procedure below.
• For Mechanical Starters - Reverse L1 and L2 on the starter.
• For Electronic Starters - Change the line rotation setting in the starter.
a. Press  once. The STATUS menu displays.
b. Press  twice. The PARAMETERS menu displays.
c. Press  and STARTING AMPS displays.
d. Press  until LINE ROTATION displays.
e. Press  to access the value.
f. Press  for CBA. (CBA = standard wet unit.)
g. Press  to select the value displayed.
h. Press  to accept the value, or  to reject the change. If the wrong value is
accepted, repeat steps e. through h.
3. Verify the correct motor wiring. See Figure 11 on page 1-14.
4. Check the motor rotation direction. If the direction is incorrect or if the

motor is making loud sounds, swap two phase leads at the top of the con-
troller’s main line fuses (FL1 - FL3).
5. Confirm the motor rotation. It may take multiple attempts to get the incoming line
phase relationship correct.

I-2/I-3 Valve Installation Section
Pump Motor Rotation

(continued)
L1 L2 L3
1 3 5
MC2
2 4 6
Electronic
Motor
Starter
T1 T2 T3
T3 T6
T2 T5
T1 T4
Figure 11 - Electronic Starter Pump Motor Wiring Diagram
I-2/I-3 Valve
The I-2/I-3 Valve is preset by Manufacturing, assembled on the power unit, and has been
tested and adjusted. The presets are attached inside the controller, ensure movement of
the car, and reduce final adjustment time.

• The I-2/I-3 Valve requires a minimum static system pressure of 90 PSI to function

properly.
• Adjust and confirm the Relief Pressure and Low Pressure on each job—at this
time if possible.
• If the empty sling is too light to achieve 90 PSI, defer the Low Pressure adjustment
until the cab is installed and 90 PSI is achieved.
• Valves by other manufacturers: refer to the applicable valve product manual for
initial setup - Bypass/Low Pressure and Relief Pressure Adjustments.

Installation Section I-2/I-3 Valve
I-2/I-3 Valve
INSTALLATION
(continued) Relief Pressure Verification
This preliminary check is to ensure that the pipe couplings and valve will not be dam-
aged if the elevator system’s oil flow or platform become restricted. The final check
for the relief pressure is set with the procedure Final Relief Pressure with Full Load on
page 2-33.
1. Close the shut-off valve.
2. Install a pressure gauge on the silencer's quick connect.
Immediately stop the power unit if the pressure exceeds 625 PSI.
3. While monitoring the pressure gauge, run the power unit in the up direction from
the runbug in short bursts. Once confirmed that the pressure will not exceed 625
PSI, the pump motor can run constantly to verify the relief pressure setting.
4. Adjust the pressure relief (if necessary) to reduce pressure below 625 PSI.
a. IN (CW) = Increase Relief Pressure
b. OUT (CCW) = Decrease Relief Pressure
5. Briefly open the Manual Lowering Valve to relieve pressure from the valve, and
confirm that the valve is fully closed when finished.
Low Pressure Adjustment
When operating elevator from the controller, follow all safety precautions.
• If the low pressure adjustment is made with the CPUC online, temporarily set
the Z44 timer to 10 seconds, and run the motor less than 10 seconds at a
time from Inspection Operation.
• OUT = Counterclockwise, CCW
IN = Clockwise, CW
1. Ensure that the car is empty and the manual lowering valve is closed.
3. Disconnect CON15 (on the IOF Card in the controller) to disable the
valve’s up slow solenoid.
4. Turn the Low Pressure adjustment screw OUT 13/4" beyond the cover
plate. See Figure 12 on page 1-16.
5. Turn the Low Pressure adjustment screw IN by hand until it touches the regu-
lator piston.

I-2/I-3 Valve Installation Section
Low Pressure Adjustment

(continued)
6. Turn the power ON, and use the runbug to start the motor.
7. Turn the Low Pressure adjustment screw IN just until the car starts to move.
8. Turn the Low Pressure adjustment screw OUT until the car movement stops.
9. After the car stops, turn the Low Pressure adjustment screw OUT an additional one-
half turn.
10. Tighten the locknut.
11. Stop the motor, and turn the power OFF.
12. Reconnect CON15 to enable the valve’s up slow solenoid.
Manual Lowering Valve
Low Pressure
Adjustment Lowering & Leveling
Speed Adjustment
Down Slowdown
Adjustment
Down Stop
Adjustment
Up Leveling
Adjustment
Up Start Up Slowdown Down Start

Up Stop
Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment
Adjustment
High Pressure
Relief Adjustment
Figure 12 - I-2/I-3 Valve

Installation Section Selector Tape
Selector Tape
INSTALLATION
Mount the Tape Close floor equipment is not required for this control system; see Floor Landing
and Close Floor Leveling Magnet Installation on page 2-19.
Selector tape is constructed of spring steel. Use EXTREME CAUTION when

cutting the band that holds the selector tape onto the spool.
Selector tape must be handled carefully. One kink will ruin the entire tape.
1. Install the top tape support bracket. See the job layout for the proper quadrant
and position.
2. Attach the selector tape to the top tape support bracket; loop the tape over the
bracket. The loop should be a minimum of 6" at its widest point. See Figure 13
on page 1-18 or Figure 14 on page 1-19.
3. Move to the bottom of the hoistway. Attach a spring plate and tape plate to the
selector tape at a point that will be no less than 6" below the selector box when
the car is on the buffers.
4. Install the bottom tape support bracket on the guide rail 181/2" below the bottom
of the spring plate.
5. Install the other spring plate on the tape support bracket. Ensure that the selec-
tor is between the spring plate and bracket.
6. Stretch the two selector tape springs between the spring plates. If properly
installed, the springs will be one and a half times their normal length; e.g., a 10"
spring will be stretched to 15".
7. Check the bow dimension in the selector tape. If the dimension is incorrect,
adjust the tape at the bottom support bracket.
8. Ensure that the selector tape is even with the bottom spring plate. Measure from
about 2" below the bottom mounting bracket, and cut off the excess selector
tape.
9. Verify that the centerline of the selector tape is aligned within 5/16" of the center-
line of the guide rails and also free of kinks throughout the hoistway.
10. The 3" wide x 3" vertical plane of the tape must be parallel to the back of the rail
±5/16" of the centerline of the guide rails and also free of kinks throughout the
hoistway.

Selector Tape Installation Section
Formed Rail Selector Tape
Forged Rail Clip, 8#

Selector Tape
½" ½" Support Bracket
½"
Loop the Tape
дΗ
½" × 1½"
дΗ
дΗ
6" Minimum
Tape Plate
д " × 1"
Spring Plate
д" × 1"
дΗ
дΗ
Bow Dimension, 1" – 2"
Tape Plate дΗ
18½"
Selector Tape Springs
*springs MUST extend Extend to 1½ times
to 1½ times original size. original size, appx. 15¼"
Spring Plate
Selector Tape
Support Bracket
Selector Tape
8½" Cut the Selector Tape flush

with the Spring Plate.
Figure 13 - Formed Rail Selector Tape Installation

Installation Section Selector Tape
T-Rail Selector Tape
INSTALLATION
Forged Rail Clip, 15#
6¼" Selector Tape

Tape Plate
Support Bracket
6¼" × 2"
дΗ
дΗпϭΗ
8" Magnetic Strip
2½" Magnetic Strip

T-Rail
дΗ
дΗпϭΗ Spring
Plate
Selector Tape Springs
*springs MUST extend
to 1½ times original size
(appx. 15¼").
дΗ
дΗпϭΗ
Selector Tape
Figure 14 - T-Rail Selector Tape Installation

Hoistway Wiring Installation Section
Hoistway Wiring
The wiring and conduit installation details represent a typical two car group, and installa-
tion for other car and group configurations is similar.
All wiring run in the duct is tied back on each side – separate high voltage from
low voltage. Do not run any low voltage wiring (including any communication wir-
ing) with any wiring that is high voltage switching, such as motor leads.
• Flexible metallic tubing (flex) can be used in conduit runs up to 6 feet.
• Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) in conduit runs longer than 6 feet.
• Check the job layout to determine the proper quadrant for location of equipment.
• Anchor bolts and hardware (for fastening conduit to the wall) are not furnished as part
of the wiring package.
• All conduit, wireway, wire, and cable is furnished in bulk and must be cut to length.
• 21/2" x 4" wireway (duct) is provided for the door interlock wiring and hall node riser.
The hall node riser consists of hall nodes mounted within the duct at each floor loca-
tion to provide interconnection and communication to hall devices such as position
indicators, hall calls, and hall lanterns for up to two cars.
• Install one 3/4" EMT run at each landing with a rear opening.
• Install EMT from the wireway to the 4" x 4" box at the rear wall.
• For rear applications, a rear riser of hall nodes is also required. The rear riser of hall
nodes is mounted in the same duct as the front riser. The rear riser provides the hall
device interconnections for up to two cars with rear openings.
• Strain bolts are supplied for installing down the hoistway wireway (at as many places
as may be necessary) to adequately support the hoistway wiring.
• Common functions within a group are wired to a single controller from the hoistway,
and then cross-connected to the remaining cars within the same group (grouped con-
trollers only).

Installation Section Hoistway Wiring
Wireway and Conduit Layout
INSTALLATION
The following procedure is a suggested method of installation. See the job wiring
diagrams and the wiring diagrams on the following pages.
Required Wireways/Conduits
• Hall station and door interlock riser

• Machine room to junction box
• Hoistway access and final limits (if required)
• Controller cross-connects (group jobs only)
1. Mount the junction box to the guide rail at a point above the center point of car
travel and also above the entrance header. See the job layout for the proper
quadrant.
2. Run wireway/conduit from the power unit/controller in the machine room to

the junction box.
3. Install the hall station and the door interlock riser.
4. Run conduit and mount the hall signal fixture boxes.
5. Run conduit and mount boxes for the position indicators, the lanterns,
and the pit stop switch.
6. Run conduit for final limits as required.

Printed in USA April 2020
Installation Section
Car 1 Rear PI or Combo PI/Lantern

Car 1 Rear Interlock
½" FLEX (typ.)
Car 1 Front PI Car 2 Rear PI or Combo PI/Lantern
or Combo PI/Lantern 2½" x 4" Wireway
End Cap ½" FLEX (typical)
Car 1 Front Interlock Car 2 Rear Interlock
6" X 6"
Outlet Box
Car 2 Front PI or Combo PI/Lantern
1" EMT Run
from Mid Hatch Box 6" X 6" Outlet Box
to 2½" x 4" Wireway, Front Hall Station
run between door
openings, or as req. Mid Hatch
Junction Box ¾" EMT
2½" EMT or Splice Car 2 Front Interlock
2½" x 4" Pull Box
Wireway ¾" EMT
Mid Hatch
Junction Box
To 2½" EMT or
1-22
Splice
Machine 2½" x 4"
Room Wireway
Car 2 Front PI or Combo PI/Lantern
Typical Hoistway Conduit/Duct Layout
Car 1 Front PI or Car 2 Front Interlock

Combo PI/Lantern ½"
Car 1 Front Interlock FLEX
Front Hall To 1" EMT Run
Station Machine from Mid Hatch Box
Traveling Cable Room to 2½" x 4" Wireway,
Pull Box run between door
openings, or as req.
Car 1 Pit
Stop Switch Traveling Cable
2½" x 4"
2½" x 4" Wireway Wireway
Connector (typ.) End Cap 2½" x 4" Wireway Connector (typ.)
End Cap
CAR 1 Car 2 Pit
Stop Switch
©Vertical Express
CAR 2
Hoistway Wiring
FOR NON-MULTIPLEX HOISTWAYS

Each car has a vertical 2½" x 4" wireway riser.
Common functions are wired from one of the car’s risers,
and then cross-wired from one controller to the other controller in the machine room.
Typical Front Conduit/Duct Layout
INSTALLATION
Divider Beam
Hall Station, 2½" X 4" Wireway
Fire Service ½" Straight Connector (Flex)
Switch
Installation ½" Flex Conduit
½" Straight Connector
½" EMT Conduit with Divider Beam

Hall Lanterns, ½" Straight Connector (EMT)
Position ½" Straight 2½" X 4" Wireway
Indicators Connector (Flex) ½" or ¾" Clamp
Installation ½" Straight Connector (Flex)
½" Flex Conduit ½" Combination Coupling ¾" Clamp
½" Flex Conduit
FRONT VIEW
½" Straight Connector (Flex)
Divider Beam
½" Flex Conduit
Door Interlock 2½" X 4" Wireway
½" Combination Coupling
Installation
½" Clamp ½" Straight Connector (Flex)
½" Flex Conduit
½" EMT Conduit with ½" Straight Connector (EMT) ¾" Clamp

Typical Rear Conduit/Duct Layout
Hall Station,
Fire Service ½" Straight Connector (Flex)
Switch
½" Flex Conduit
Installation
Divider Beam ½" Straight Connector (Flex)
4" x 4" Outlet Box
¾" EMT & Fittings
2½" X 4" Wireway
½" or ¾" Straight Connector (Flex) ¾" Clamp ¾" Clamp ¾" Flex Conduit
Hall Lanterns,
Position Indicators
Installation
½" or ¾" ¾" Combination Coupling ½" or ¾" Straight
Flex Conduit Connector (Flex)
½" or ¾" EMT Conduit with 4" x 4" Outlet Box

½" or ¾" Straight Connector (EMT)
¾" EMT & Fittings
2½" X 4" Wireway
Divider Beam
½" Combination Coupling
Door Interlock
Installation
½" Straight Connector (Flex)
½" Flex Conduit ½" Clamp ¾" Clamp
½" EMT Conduit with ½" Flex Conduit
½" Straight Connector (EMT) ½" Straight Connector (Flex)
4" x 4" Outlet Box
Divider Beam
¾" EMT & Fittings
2½" X 4" Wireway
Strain Bolt Install strain bolt in the wireway as shown.

Installation Remove one knockout on each side of the
wireway and install the strain bolt. Secure
hoistway wires to the bolt with tie wraps.

Interlock Wiring
INSTALLATION
For job specific connections, see the job wiring diagrams and job specific Field Wiring Chart (940KW).
Hoistway Access (HWA) Landing interlocks connect to the following dedicated inputs:
• One for the bottom HWA landing.

• One for the top HWA landing.
• All Front non-HWA landing contacts connect in series to a dedicated input.
• All Rear non-HWA landing contacts connect in series to a dedicated input.
CLOSED & LOCKED inputs; used for standard passenger doors & closed/locked input contacts for freight doors.
Signal Return
IOF IOF
Input Name Connection Name Connection Description
2H2 IB CON5-2 AC1B CON5-1 Dedicated input for the bottom HWA landing hoistway door contact.
2H5 IT CON5-4 AC1B CON5-3 Dedicated input for the top HWA landing hoistway door contact.
Dedicated input for the series string of all front non-HWA landing
216 IF CON5-6 AC1B CON5-5
hoistway door contacts.
Dedicated input for the series string of all rear non-HWA landing
226 IR CON5-8 AC1B CON5-7
hoistway door contacts.
CLOSED & NOT LOCKED inputs; used for closed & not locked input contacts for freight door applications.
Signal Return
IOF IOF
Input Name Connection Name Connection Description
For freight door applications: Dedicated input for the bottom HWA
3H2 CB CON13-2 AC1B CON13-1
landing hoistway door contact.
For freight door applications: Dedicated input for the top HWA land-
3H5 CT CON13-4 AC1B CON13-3
ing hoistway door contact.
For freight door applications: Dedicated input for the series string of
316 CF CON13-6 AC1B CON13-5
all front non-HWA landing hoistway door contacts.
For freight door applications: Dedicated input for the series string of
326 CR CON13-8 AC1B CON13-7
all rear non-HWA landing hoistway door contacts.

Interlock Wiring
(continued)
This is a reference drawing. Inputs not used per job will be jumped out permanently. See job wiring diagrams.
AC1B
Switches Indicate Closed Switches Indicate Closed

Position of Hoistway Position of Hoistway
Doors (Not Locked) Doors (Not Locked)
5:1 13:1
Interlock AC1B AC1B
at Bottom IB 3-1 CB 3-5 Non HWA
HWA Door X2 Input Input X2 BTM Closed
5:2 13:2
CPU CPU
2H2 3H2
PLD SP SP PLD
5:3 13:3
AC1B AC1B
Interlock
at Top IT 3-2 CT 3-6 Non HWA
HWA Door X2 Input Input X2 Top Closed
5:4 13:4
CPU CPU
2H5 3H5
PLD SP SP PLD
5:5 13:5
Interlock AC1B AC1B
String of
IF 3-3 CF 3-7 Non HWA
Front Non
X2 Input Input X2 Front Closed
HWA Doors 5:6 13:6
CPU CPU 316
216
PLD SP SP PLD
5:7 13:7
Interlock AC1B AC1B
String of
IR 3-4 CR 3-8 Non HWA
Rear Non
X2 Input Input X2 Front Closed
HWA Doors 5:8 13:8
CPU CPU
226 326
PLD SP SP PLD
CHKDS 8-6
X1 OUTPUT
CPU
AC2
IOF
Figure 15 - Interlock Wiring Drawing - For Reference Only

Traveling Cable Installation
INSTALLATION
Formed Rail
Hatch Mounting Assembly Mid Hatch Junction Box
JUNCTION BOX
MOUNTING 2½" EMT to MR (optional)
Kellums Grip 2½" x 4" Wireway to MR (optional)
Traveling Cable to Car
All traveling cable wires and hoistway wires must enter the controller
cabinet on the right side where the CPUC and IOF Cards are located.
CPUC & IOF

Cards
LOW
VOLTAGE
WIRING

Hoistway Entrance Frames and Doors Installation Section
Hoistway Entrance Frames and Doors

Install the Entrance Frames and Hoistway Doors.
See the appropriate Vertical Express entrance component manuals for instructions.
Cab See the Installation Manual for instructions.

The low pressure valve setting may need adjusting now that the car is complete.
For more information, see I-2/I-3 Valve Reference on page 5R-7.
Door Operator
Mount the door operator(s) and complete the external mechanical adjustments. See the
appropriate Vertical Express door operator manuals and the job wiring diagrams for
instructions.
For systems using Vertical Express door operators, which will be communicating to the
controller via CAN, configure the CAN loading of the door operator at the time of installa-
tion. Typical installations should have loading resistors removed/disabled on the door
operator. See the Service Information section of this manual for more information.
Selector Box Mounting and Alignment

1. Adjust the selector mounting bracket so that the selector box is centered side to side
and vertically, parallel to the tape. Tighten the bracket to the stile or the crosshead.
See Figure 16 on page 1-29 and Figure 17 on page 1-30.
2. Move the selector box toward the tape until all the guide halves just touch the tape.
Tighten the selector box to the bracket.
3. Align the selector box with the selector tape so that the tape will go through the guides
in a straight path. The guides must not bend the tape.
4. Align the auxiliary sensor assembly with the selector box alignment pins and the con-
nector on the main sensor assembly.
5. Be careful not to cross-thread the screws, and turn screws into the box about four
turns.
6. Press the auxiliary sensor assembly into place. Tighten the screws enough to com-
press the washers.
7. Verify the following and, if necessary, readjust:

• The selector box is centered on the tape.
• The guides are not deflecting the tape from front to back.
• The guides are not pressing against the sides of the tape.

Installation Section Selector Box Mounting and Alignment
Formed Rail Selector Box
INSTALLATION
Use provided fastener package 200MR2 Use provided fastener package 200MR1
to attach the bracket to the selector tape. to attach the bracket to the stile.
Formed Rail
Selector Tape
Stile
Selector Harness
196WT1 Stile Selector Bracket

Move bracket to rail side of stile
flange, if necessary.
To Car Header
Notes:
1. For opposite hand mounting, move bracket to other side of selector box.
2. When car is at top of hoistway, align selector with tape. The sensor board position is adjustable.
3. Use 196WT1 stile selector bracket with formed rails.
Figure 16 - Formed Rail Selector Box and Tape Installation

Selector Box Mounting and Alignment Installation Section
T-Rail Selector Box
Use provided fastener package 200MR2 Use provided fastener package 200MR1
to attach the bracket to the selector tape. to attach the bracket to the stile.
Selector Tape
Stile
196WT2-5 Stile Selector Bracket

Move bracket to rail side of stile
Selector Harness flange, if necessary.
To Car Header
Notes:
1. For opposite hand mounting, move bracket to other side of selector box.
2. When car is at top of hoistway, align selector with tape. The sensor board position is adjustable.
3. Use 196WT2, 196WT3, 196WT4, and 196WT5 stile selector brackets with t-rails.
Figure 17 - T-Rail Selector Box and Tape Installation

Installation Section Selector Box Mounting and Alignment
Twin Post Selector Box
INSTALLATION
1. Align selector with tape when car is at top of hoistway, sensor board position is adjustable.
2. Selector bracket (268YT001) mounts to selector with fastener package (200MR2).
For ICON32, use the supplied bolts, washers, and lock washers.
T-Rail Stile
Selector Mounting
Plate (165BYP002)
Selector
Tape
Crosshead
Channel
Guide Shoe
Bracket
Selector
Harness
Selector Bracket
(268YT001)
Bolt Kit (200CAH002)

Selector Box Mounting and Alignment Installation Section
Tape Selector Bolt Kit for Crosshead Mount (200BWY001)
Crosshead Mount
• Back of rail to this side of mount, 12" maximum
• Weld gussets provided for cases that crosshead mount does not fit.
Back of Guide Rail
Crossheads
Toe to Toe Across

the Crosshead
Range 10" to 12"
Crosshead Height 6" to 9"

Weld gussets provided for
cases that crosshead mount
does not fit. ϻШІЋΗǆ1Η ϻШІЋΗ
дΗ
дΗǆвΗ
ϻШІЋΗ
дΗ
дΗǆвΗ

Installation Section Car Top Wiring
Car Top Wiring
INSTALLATION
Required Material – Door operator harness - front & rear, as required
– Auxiliary swing return harness, as required – Fan and lights harness
– 21/2" wireway - rear doors only – 1/2" flex conduit and fittings
– Slotted end cap(s) – Slotted cover plates

• Slotted end caps and cover plates are shipped from Manufacturing in a wiring

package.
• In all steps, leave any excess wire in the header.
• Unless stated otherwise, all of the following steps are for all jobs.
1. Insert the end of the selector harness through the end of the header and into the
main swing return. Connect flex conduit to the car header end cap, or where the
selector harness enters the car; leave wires disconnected in the swing return.
2. Connect the front door operator harness to the slotted cover plate, and pull the
MTA connectors through the header and into the main swing return; leave dis-
connected in the swing return.
3. On jobs with selective doors, wire the rear door operator harness as follows:
a. Begin in the rear header nearest the door operator, and connect the flex con-
duit from the rear door operator harness to the slotted cover plate.
b. Pull the rear door operator harness out through the rear header cover plate
to the 21/2" wireway that runs along the side of the car top.
c. In the second hole of the 21/2" wireway, attach flex conduit onto the harness.
d. In the opposite end of the 21/2" wireway cover, start at the second hole and
attach the next section of flex conduit to the cover plate of the front header.
e. Route the harness cable through the front header and pull the connectors
into the main swing return; leave disconnected in the swing return.
4. Connect the wires from the door protective device to the door operator.
5. Install conduit, and pull lights and fan wiring to main swing return terminal strip.
6. Pull the front auxiliary swing return harness through the header and into the
main swing return.

Machine Room Wiring Installation Section
Car Top Wiring

(continued) 7. On jobs with selective doors, wire the rear auxiliary swing return harness as follows:
a. Pull the rear auxiliary swing return harness through the rear header to the end cap
nearest the 21/2" wireway that runs along the side of the car top.
b. Attach the flex conduit to the rear header end cap and also to the first hole in the
21/2" wireway cover.
c. Attach the flex conduit to the other end of the wireway cover and also to the end
cap of the front header.
d. Route the harness cable through the front header and into the main swing return.
Swing Return Wiring

The selector, the car top inspection station, and the hoistway access inputs (when pro-
vided) must be connected and functional to accomplish Controller Inspection or Car Top
Inspection modes of operation.
1. Turn OFF, Lockout, and Tagout the cab lighting circuit.
2. Connect the traveling cable to the swing return rail terminals (RT). See the swing
return terminal labels and the job wiring diagrams.

The LD-16 door operator has an adapter harness that wires the operator into the COP rail

terminals (RT).
3. Connect the lights and fan wiring (L10, L10s, L20, and ground) to the swing return ter-
minal strip.
Machine Room Wiring

Controller Card Connections
1. Turn OFF, Lockout and Tagout the mainline disconnect.
2. Make wiring connections in the Trades Access terminals.
3. Make wiring connections between the swing return (RT) and the elevator controller.
4. The various I/O will be assigned connections to the CNA Card(s), the IOF Card, the RT
(rail terminals), and the DPIA Card. See the wiring diagrams and provided job specific
Field Wiring Chart (940KW).

• Route the mainline power through the top left-hand corner of the controller.

• Route the hoistway wiring and traveling cable through the top right-hand corner of
the controller.
• Group jobs only: Working from the right-hand side of the controllers, wire control-
ler cross-connects between the controllers.
5. Wire the building power and other necessary connections (cab lighting, telephone,
etc.) to the Trades Access terminals.

ADJUSTMENT SECTION
ADJUSTMENT SECTION
Adjustment Section Contents
Contents
Preliminary Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Remove Temporary Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
User Interface Tool (UIT) Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Software Verification Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Safety Processor Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Configure the Safety Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
CAN Node Address Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Verify Proper Resistive Loading for the CAN Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
CAN Node Configuration via the Startup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
I/O and Safety String Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Troubleshooting I/O Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Car Top Inspection Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Selector Tape Magnet Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Selector Tape and Box Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Magnet Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Preliminary Setup for Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Hoistway Scan Through the Startup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Door Setup and Final Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
I-2/I-3 Valve - Final Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Valve Adjustment Up Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Valve Adjustment Down Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Performance Check with Full Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Final Relief Pressure with Full Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Floor Position & Leveling Magnet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Terminal Slowdown Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Verify Proper Function of the UP Terminal Slowdown Magnets via the UIT . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Verify Proper Function of the DOWN Terminal Slowdown Magnets via the UIT . . . . . . 2-36
Final Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
ESP200 Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Electronic Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Operational Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Configure the THY02 Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Additional Operational Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Save Parameters and Backup Job Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Contents Adjustment Section
This page
intentionally
left blank.

Adjustment Section Preliminary Adjustment
Preliminary Adjustment
Before beginning this section, the following must be completed:
1. The hoistway and traveling cable wiring.
2. The selector tape installation.
3. All components and sub-systems prepared for Automatic Operation.
ADJUSTMENT
4. The Valve Low Pressure and Bypass are set.
5. The leveling speed is set to 10-12 FPM.
Remove Temporary Operation

2. Place the controller on Inspection Service.
3. Unplug CON4 on the IOF Card.
4. Remove the temporary runbug.
5. Remove the following temporary orange jumpers:

• Electronic Starters: 134 to MCC1 and MUTS to USS1.
• Across the Line Starters: 134 to USS1 and MCC1.
• Trades Access Panel: EPD2 to EPD2.
6. Connect the disconnect auxiliary contact between EPD1 and EPD2 terminals of
the Trades Access Panel. This action prevents alternate power from powering up
the controller with the disconnect in the OFF position.
7. Install plugs 9a, 19, 20, and 21 to corresponding connectors on the IOF Card.
9. Confirm that the Watchdog (WD) LED on the CPUC is illuminated. See Figure 1
on page 2-4.
10. Confirm that the AC, P24, and P24G LEDs on the IOF Card are illuminated.
See Figure 1.
11. Confirm that the P24GS LED on Power Supply Module (PSM) P24GS is illumi-
nated. The P24GS fuse and PSM are located on DIN Rail above IOF Card.
12. Remove power.
13. Connect CON4 on the IOF Card.
14. Verify that the AC LED is still illuminated.

Preliminary Adjustment Adjustment Section
Remove Temporary Operation

(continued)
CPUC CARD
Watchdog (WD) LED
AC P24 P24GS P24G

The P24GS fuse is not populated on the
IOF Card. The fuse and PSM are located
on the DIN Rail above the IOF Card.
Figure 1 - IOF Card Illuminated LED’s

User Interface Tool (UIT) Menu Tree
PRESS A BUTTON TO BEGIN
Vertical
Express Block Select Block Select Block Select Block Select
Real Time Motion System Clock Startup Wizard Inspector’s Tests
Enter Pin #
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER
Motion/Position Time hh:mm:ss Start Wizard?
ADJUSTMENT
FLT
1 2 3 4 Status Date mm:dd:yy UP = Yes DN = No RFL
UP DN ESC ENTER TFR
Arbiter No
Yes SCCB
Pin: 1234144 Velocity
(if incorrect, press reset) Set the Time? Clear CN Config SCC2-SCCn
Notes: ENTER UP = Yes DN = No SCCT
Config CNs
• Use UP and DN to scroll Set the Date? (Set Car Call Bottom,
QUICK COMMANDS Auto Hoistway Scan
through blocks. UP = Yes DN = No 2,3,.... top in order)
• Press ENTER to select. Show Faults* Write to Flash
• While in block menus, Show Fault Details* Save Job to USB
use UP and DN to navigate. Clear Faults*
• Use ESC to back out. Block Select
Reset Fault List
Logoff UIT?
Front Car Call
Rear Car Call UP = Yes DN = No
UP Hall Call
DN Hall Call
Block Select Show Stable Leveling
Adjustments Show I/O
*only displays if faults are present.
ENTER
ESC
Adjust Car/Group
Commands Common
Commands Upload
SUBMENU SUBMENU SUBMENU SUBMENU SUBMENU
Commands Startup
Adjust Car/Group Commands Commands Commands Commands
Commands Group Common Upload Startup Group
Front Door
Rear Door
Job Parameters (Jxx) CJR UFWCNC DCN GPN
SUBMENUS DSL UFWCNH ELD SCA
Car Information
Code Blue (Cxx) FCP UFWSPF JRT SCAI
FJR UFWSLF PRT SUC
Desination Dispatch
GET OSDMI SCF SDC
Doors (Dxx)
IOView OSDM SPC SRU
Emergency Power (Exx) STUA
IRL UDLS SRD
Fire Service (Fxx) STU
IRLR UDLR SSI
Fixtures (Xxx) TECC
RFL SHL
Homing & Shutdown (Hxx) TECCR
RRF PIG
Incon Riser (Rxx) WRTG
SCC
Motion (Mxx) SFL
Options 1 (Oxx) SFLR
Options 2 (Zxx) SRC
Parking & Zoning (Lxx) TMP
Position System (Pxx) TSR
Security (Sxx) TSRT
Traffic VER
WJR
WRT

Software Verification Procedure
1. Verify that the Controller Inspection Switch in on INSP.
2. Press any button while Vertical Express is displayed in the UIT window, and enter the
pin number - 1234144. See Figure 2.

If the wrong pin number is entered, continue to press UP until Vertical Express appears in

the display window, then enter the pin number again.
Vertical Express Display

Window
1 2 3 4
The numbers on the buttons above are for

illustration and are not printed on the actual UIT.
Figure 2 - UIT Main Menu Screen
3. Issue a VER Command.
a. When BLOCK SELECT ADJUSTMENTS displays, press ENTER.
BLOCK SELECT
ADJUSTMENTS
b. Press UP until ADJUST MENU COMMANDS COMMON displays.
ADJUST MENU
COMMANDS COMMON


(continued)
c. Press UP until VER displays, press ENTER, and window displays this data:
Top Line JOB:xxxnnn CPUC:vxry, CPUCfpga: vxry, IOFfpga:vxry

Bottom Line SP: vxry, SP:fpga:0, NP: vxry, CWILA:vx, CWILB:VX, SELA:vx,
SELB:vx, HNBTopA: vx, HNBTopB:vx, HNBBotA:vx, HNBBotB: vx
ADJUSTMENT
v = version • If any of the safety nodes are offline, the car is shutdown and a fault is logged.
x = version number • Background color removed for clarity.
r = revision
y = revision number
This controller contains software that is under AECO A17.7 Control. When
replacing boards or functions involving this controlled software, verify that
the replacement or updated software is the same version listed on the
580AMY marker attached to the controller.
Fill out the following chart. If any processor/node reports version zero (0), the device
is not communicating; see Troubleshooting.
Definition Installed Software Version

CPUC Controller Generic
SP Safety Processor
NP Normal Processor
SELA Selector Node A
CWIL/DPIA DPIA Node A
Safety Processor Verification

1. Verify that the Controller Inspection Switch is on INSP.
2. Use the following information to verify that either the SP Good LED or the SP Bad
LED is illuminated.
• SP Good LED illuminated: Continue to CAN Node Address Assignment on
page 2-8.
• SP Bad LED illuminated: Continue to CAN Node Address Assignment on
page 2-8.

The SP Bad should be glowing until the safety nodes are online and

indicate a ready to run condition. Configure the Safety Processor if
the IOF Card was exchanged with another controller.
• SP Good/SP Bad LEDs toggle back and forth: The Safety Processor is not
configured. Continue to the next procedure.

Configure the Safety Processor
1. Find the Safety Processor (SP) Programming Jumper JP2 (located on the IOF Card
next to RSTSP).
2. Place the SP Programming Jumper on pins 1 and 2.
3. From the UIT, press any button while Vertical Express is displayed, and enter the pin
number - 1234144. If the wrong pin number is entered, continue to press UP until Ver-
tical Express appears in the window, then enter the pin number again. See Figure 2 on
page 2-6.
4. From the UIT, access Block Select Adjustments and press ENTER.
5. Press UP or DOWN to scroll to Commands Startup, and press ENTER.
6. Press UP or DOWN to scroll to the SPC Command, and press ENTER.
• The UIT should display SP Config Complete.

• If the SP Programming Jumper is in the wrong position or the jumper shunt is bad,
the UIT will return SP Programming Jumper Not Installed. Correct the jumper,
and press ENTER again.
8. Press RST on the CPUC Card. Once the controller recovers, repeat the steps to access
the main menu screen.
At this point, the Safety Processor is configured and either the SP Good or the SP Bad LED
should be illuminated.
NEW The SP BAD LED will remain lit until the safety nodes are online and indicate a ready to run
condition.
CAN Node Address Assignment
Overview CAN nodes must be correctly addressed by jumpers in order to be properly identified by
the controller software for I/O assignment. The CAN Node Address Assignment procedure
uses the DCN Command to display each of the possible nodes (0-11), and this information
is recorded so that the node addressing is set correctly for each node. CAN resistive load-
ing is checked and corrected as necessary to ensure stable communications to all nodes.
The nodes are then configured to prepare for Automatic Operation.

CAN nodes may not indicate ONLINE until they have been successfully configured (TECC).



(continued)
1. Have some paper and pen/pencil ready to record the following data for future
use: Node ID, SmartName, online status, and channel.
2. Access the UIT.
3. Navigate to BLOCK SELECT ADJUSTMENTS, and press ENTER.
ADJUSTMENT
BLOCK SELECT
ADJUSTMENTS
4. Navigate to ADJUST MENU COMMANDS START UP, and press ENTER.
ADJUST MENU
COMMANDS STARTUP
5. After DCN displays, press ENTER.
DCN— Display Sta

UP: Next DN: Prev
6. CN Node = 0 displays. Press UP or DOWN to select the proper CN Node ID,

and press ENTER.
CN Node=0
UP:+ DN:—
7. When Ping a Port? displays, press DOWN.


(continued)
The CN Node ID (selected from step 6) displays, followed by its SmartName. The DCN information will begin to scroll
from left to right on both lines at different rates, see image below. Pressing UP or DOWN will pause the scroll until the
UP or DOWN is pressed again.
CN:1 CNAMAIN1--- ONLINE:1 Pcks:86 CH:2 v:32 uP18Fxxxx SP:0 TP:12

Ports: 3, 24, 25, 26, 2, 23, 24, 2, 255, 255, 255
Top Line Display Bottom

Top Line Display
Line
CN: The node ID Display
CNA- SmartName
Online: Online status: 0 = Offline, 1 = Online
Pcks: # of received data packets
CAN channel from which the node is assigned to
CH: communicate: 2 = Car, 3 = Hall
V: Software version
uP18Fxxxx microprocessor version for that node
SP: # of shared ports
TP: # of total ports assigned to the node
Bottom Line Display
Port assignments for ports 0 (zero) through 15 = the numbers
represent the port number of the I/O map the port is to use, and all
unused ports for a node receive a port assignment of 255.
CNA Cards always have 12 total ports assigned to them.
8. Record the CN, the SmartName, and the CH information.

ICON32 Controllers should have the MODCTRL1 node on CH: 2 — the main interface node

for the typical job mounted on the center divider of the controller.
9. Press ESC.
10. Repeat step 6 through step 9 for each node 0-11.
11. Verify the addressing jumpers for any CAN Node Card used in the system. See Table 1
on page 6-11.

A CAN node may be CN, CNA, or any future CAN Node Card. When the jumpers are

populated on the card, the jumpers assigned functions are the same across the card
assemblies.


(continued)
CN Card Node Addressing
JP7 JP6 JP5 JP4
CN Card 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
CN Card 1 OFF OFF OFF ON
CN Card 2 OFF OFF ON OFF
CN Card 3 OFF OFF ON ON
ADJUSTMENT
CN Card 4 OFF ON OFF OFF
CN Card 5 OFF ON OFF ON
CN Card 6 OFF ON ON OFF
CN Card 7 OFF ON ON ON
CN Card 8 ON OFF OFF OFF
CN Card 9 ON OFF OFF ON
CN Card 10 ON OFF ON OFF
CN Card 11 ON OFF ON ON
Table 1 - CN Card Node Addressing
12. Verify that JP14 is ON pins 1-2.
13. Verify that JP8 is OFF.
14. Confirm any CAN node designated "CH:2" is wired to CCH/CCL. See job prints.
15. Confirm any CAN node designated "CH:3" is wired to HC1H/HC1L. See the job
prints.
Verify Proper Resistive Loading for the CAN Channels

Perform this procedure each time a controller or a CAN node is added to the CAN
channels.
1. Turn OFF, Lockout, and Tagout the mainline disconnect. All cars in the group
must be de-energized to correctly measure resistance on the Hall and Group
CAN channels.
2. Verify that all cars in the group are cross-connected as follows:

a. CON40 on the IOF, RCH/RCL, P24XC, and G24.

HC1H/HC1L is only necessary if that channel has been assigned node(s), see

CAN Node Address Assignment procedure.
b. Fire Service I/O from the Trades Access Panel.

c. All Group I/O: Hall Calls, Fire Service Inputs, Security, etc.
d. EPNP - only if alternate power is used for Emergency Power. Do not cross-
connect EPNP for battery lowering cars.

Verify Proper Resistive Loading

(continued)
3. Measure the resistive loading for the Car CAN channel, between CCH and CCL.
a. Measure from CON2 or CON3 on the IOF Card (located in the controller) across
CCH and CCL. The typical measurement is 60 ohms +/-3 ohms.
b. If the resistive loading is incorrect, see CAN Channel Resistive Loading Verification
on page 4-7.
4. Repeat step 3 for each controller.
Remove all power from connected controllers before performing any Group and
Hall CAN channel resistance checks.
5. Perform the following appropriate procedure. If either procedure does not apply to the
job, continue to step 6.
• If the controller is connected to other controllers (grouped):
a. Remove power from all controllers in the group.

b. Measure resistance, as if the systems were in operation, between RCH and RCL
(Group CAN Channel) with all control system CAN communication connections
connected.
c. Check the resistance from any controller in the group, across RCH and RCL from
CON40 of the IOF Card. The typical measurement is 60 ohms +/-3 ohms.
d. If the resistive loading is incorrect, see CAN Channel Resistive Loading Verification
on page 4-7.
• If the Hall CAN channel is used and the controller is not connected to other controllers
(grouped):
a. Remove power from all controllers in the group.

b. Measure the resistance, as if the systems were in operation, between HC1H and
HC1L (Hall CAN Channel) with all control system CAN communication connections
connected.
c. Check the resistance from each connected controller in the group, across HC1H
and HC1L from CON1 of the IOF Card. The typical measurement is 60 ohms +/-3
ohms.
d. If the resistive loading is incorrect, see CAN Channel Resistive Loading Verification
on page 4-7.
6. Restore power, return elevator(s) to service, and verify proper operation.

Adjustment Section CAN Node Configuration via the Startup Wizard
CAN Node Configuration via the Startup Wizard

The Startup Wizard will guide the user through the set up, configure all CAN Nodes,
execute a hoistway scan, and save parameter changes.
1. Press any button while Vertical Express is displayed in the UIT window, and
enter the pin number - 1234144. See Figure 3.
If the wrong pin number is entered, continue to press UP until Vertical Express
ADJUSTMENT

appears in the display window, then enter the pin number again.

Window
1 2 3 4

2. Access the Startup Wizard.

a. Press UP or DOWN until Block Select Startup Wizard displays, and then
press ENTER.
b. When Start Wizard? displays, press UP.
3. Issue a Clear CN Config Command.
a. When Clear CN Config? displays, press ENTER.
b. When TECCR only allowed from the riser Master displays, press ENTER
(NEXT TEST).
4. Configure the CN’s.
a. When Config CN displays, press ENTER.
b. When TECCR only allowed from the riser Master displays, press ENTER
(NEXT TEST).
5. When Auto Hoistway Scan? displays, displays, press UP to skip.

6. Save the parameters.
a. When Write to Flash displays, press ENTER.
b. When Write Complete displays, press ESC.

I/O and Safety String Checkout Adjustment Section
I/O and Safety String Checkout

1. Verify the following:
a. The controller stop switch is in the STOP position.
b. The controller inspection switch is in the NORMAL position.
c. The car top inspection switch is in the INSP position.
d. The car doors are closed, and the Car Door Bypass switch on the IOF is in the OFF
position.
e. The hoistway doors are closed, and the Hoistway Door Bypass switch on the IOF is
in the OFF position.
f. All Emergency Protective Devices (EPD) in the safety string are in the ready to run
position.
g. All in-car stop switches are in the Run position.
h. All temporary jumpers are removed from the system.
i. No jumpers are installed on the IOF Card, CON46 or CON47.

The safety processor system is configured by manufacturing and the CAN nodes should,

upon power up, result in an illuminated SPGOOD LED. If not, SPGOOD and SPBAD LED’s
will toggle and a 1920 Fault is registered. For details, see Configure the Safety Processor
on page 2-8.
3. Place the controller stop switch in the RUN position.
4. Check for 120VAC from Ground to:
• IOF CON4-1 (CDCR)
• IOF CON4-2 (CDCF)
• IOF CON4-3 (121)
• IOF CON4-4 (CST)
• IOF CON8-1 (131)

Any open interlock circuit will cause a power loss at 121 (IOF CON4-3) via SAFCPU or

SAFSP. See the job wiring diagrams to troubleshoot any missing voltages.
5. Scroll to Real Time Motion > ENTER > Quick Commands, then scroll to Show I/O.

Adjustment Section I/O and Safety String Checkout

(continued)
6. Verify the I/O states per Table 2 on page 2-16. If the I/O states do not match the
chart, use the job wiring diagrams for the following:
a. If an optional I/O is not as indicated, and not used by the system, ignore it.
b. Verify that the safety string is made.
ADJUSTMENT
c. Verify that the door circuits (interlock and gate switches) are made.
d. Verify that the car stop switch circuit is made.

EPNP, PRSW, OLTO are required to be in the active state to permit expected

operation.
• EPNP may prohibit up runs.
• OLTO will shut the car down.
• PRSW will prevent a down run.
7. Press ENTER.
8. Verify the I/O Port # and Correct I/O Pattern per Table 2 on page 2-16.
9. Confirm that the SPGOOD, NPGOOD, and PLDGOOD LED’s (located on the IOF
Card) are illuminated (green LED’s).
• If the above LED’s are illuminated, proceed to the next section.

• If the above LED’s are not illuminated, and the corresponding red LED’s
(NPBAD, SPBAD, or PLDBAD) are illuminated, perform the following steps:
a. Scroll to Real Time Motion.
b. Press ENTER, and then press ENTER a second time.
c. Press UP or DOWN until Reset Faults displays.
d. Press ENTER.
e. Press UP or DOWN until Clear Faults displays.
f. Press ENTER.
g. Press UP until Show Faults displays.
h. Correct issues causing critical faults. For details, see Diagnostics section.
i. Once the SPGOOD LED is illuminated, proceed to the next section.

I/O and Safety String Checkout Adjustment Section

(continued)
Correct I/O I/O Number

Port # Pattern 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 01000101 INCN INCNM INCNU INCND CDBM CDBM2 HDBM HDBM2
2 00000000 BYCST BYHA BYHAR BYHAB BYHAT BYCDB BYHDB BYDZ
3 11111111 IB IT IF IR CB CT CF CR
4 11111111 SAFSPM SAFCPU SAFCPM SAFE TSRCPU CDCF CDCR CST
5 010000-- MCC1 MCC2 UFS USS DFS DSS --- ---
6 010000-- MCC1M MCC2M UFSM USSM DFSM DSSM --- ---
7 0001-101 MUTS MCF MCE MCD --- PRSW OLTS OLTO
8 100-0100 BLOM BLO CHKBLO --- CHKTSR CHKDS TSRCPM NTSNPM
10 00000001 FSM FSX FSE FST FSSR STBC EPW EPNP
17 00000101 INCTM INCTU INCTD INCTU2 INCTD2 INCT INHA INHAM
LEGEND Table 2 - I/O Port # and I/O Correct Pattern

‘---’ = Irrelevant Ready to Run - Car Top Inspection
BOLD = I/O Always Present
I/O State = INACTIVE
I/O State = ACTIVE
ITALICIZED = Optional I/O

• SAFE, CDCF, CDCR, CST and all interlock inputs (port 3) must be active with no critical

controller faults in order for SAFSPM, SAFCPU, SAFCPM, and TSRCPU to be active.
• Any optional I/O present in the job software must be in the indicated state for the
Correct I/O Pattern column.
• MCC2, MCC2M = Only seen on jobs with electronic or Wye-Delta (2 contactor) starting.
• MUTS, MCF = Only seen on jobs with electronic starting.
• MCE, MCD = Only seen on jobs with across-the-line (1 contactor) starting.
• PRSW = Only seen on jobs equipped with a low pressure switch.
• OLTS, OLTO = Only seen on jobs equipped with viscosity control thermostats.
• INHA, INHAM = Only seen on jobs with hoistway access.
• Bit Patterns provided are for jobs with electronic starting and hoistway access.
• I/O locations marked with an X are either unassigned or have a signal assigned whose
status is unimportant at this point. If required, refer to the job’s Car I/O Assignment
Sheet.

Adjustment Section Car Top Inspection Operation
Troubleshooting I/O Issues

1. Check the controller fault log for applicable faults.
2. If Ports 1 - 10 all display zeros, both the Safety Processor and the NTSD
Processor have mismatched I/O with the CPU.
a. Verify F1 on the IOF Card is good.
b. Reload the controller generic files and the job configuration files.
ADJUSTMENT
c. Configure the Safety Processor. See page 2-8.
d. Perform the following from the Startup Wizard.
• Clear CN Config?
• Config CN.
3. If the SP and NP I/O mismatch faults still exist, then communication is faulty
between the IOF and the CPUC Cards. See the Troubleshooting section for more
help.
Car Top Inspection Operation

1. Verify there are no jumpers installed that interfere with car or hall door interlocks.
2. Ensure that the car door bypass and hoistway door bypass switches on the IOF
are in the OFF position.
3. Place the car top stop switch in the STOP position.
4. Confirm that the car top inspection switch is in the INSP position.
5. Ensure that the car will not run with the car top stop switch in the STOP position.
6. Place the car top RUN/STOP switch in the RUN position.
7. Verify that the car will only run Up when UP and ENABLE are pressed.
8. Confirm that the car will only run Down when DOWN and ENABLE are pressed.
9. Ensure that the car will not run with the car door or any hoistway door open.
10. Verify that the car will not run when any contact in the safety circuit is opened (pit
stop switch, final limits, fireman’s stop, emergency exit, car stop switch). See the
Safety Circuit page in the job wiring diagrams.
11. Leave the AUTO/INSP switch in the INSP position.

Selector Tape Magnet Installation Adjustment Section
Selector Tape Magnet Installation

Selector Tape and Box Inspection
1. Inspect and clean the selector tape. Use a wire brush to remove cement, drywall,
mud, etc., and use fine sandpaper (400 grit) to remove nicks and burrs.
2. After cleaning, wipe down the tape with a clean rag. If the tape cannot be completely
cleaned, it MUST be replaced.
3. Inspect the selector box for damage or defects. The guides must be free of dirt, not
binding on the tape, or extremely loose.
Magnet Placement

• Floor level magnets are the only magnets placed on the front (or car side) of the

tape. See Figure 6 on page 2-22.
• Slowdown and directional magnets are placed on the side of the tape facing away
from the car (back side). See Figure 4 on page 2-20 and Figure 5 on page 2-21.
• Handed references are noted as if facing the tape from the car.
• The magnets have their magnetic south marked with a yellow stripe. The yellow-
striped south side faces out and should be visible for all tape magnets except the top
floor slowdown (NTSD) magnets.
Top Terminal Slowdown & Directional Limits

1. Position the car so that it is level and at the top landing.
In the next step, a metal scribe will damage the tape.

2. Use a marker that will not damage the tape, and mark the tape at the top of the
selector box. See Figure 4 on page 2-20.
3. Move the car out of the way to provide access for installation of the magnets.
4. Determine how many initial terminal slowdown magnets are to be installed.
5. Start placement of the bottom edge of the first terminal slowdown magnet "T" inches
below the top of the selector box mark. Stack the determined number of magnets up
toward the "Top of Tape Selector Box"—line the magnets end to end with the north
polarity facing out (black side out).
6. Start placement of the directional limit magnets 61/4" below the selector box mark.
Place two 8" magnets end to end with the south polarity facing out (yellow side out).
The magnets must be extended up the hoistway far enough so that the selector
sensors cannot run off of the magnets at the extreme limit of travel up past the
top floor. See Figure 8 on page 2-24.
Bottom Terminal Slowdown & Directional Limits

1. Position the car so that it is level and at the bottom landing.

Adjustment Section Selector Tape Magnet Installation
Magnet Placement
(continued)

selector box. See Figure 5 on page 2-21.
4. Determine how many initial terminal slowdown magnets are to be installed.
ADJUSTMENT
5. Start placement of the top edge of the first terminal slowdown magnet "D"
inches above the top of the selector box mark. Place the magnets end to end
with the south polarity facing out (yellow side out).
6. Start placement of the directional limit magnets 91/4" below the top of the selec-
tor box mark. Place two 8" magnets end to end with the south polarity facing out
(yellow side out).
The magnets must be extended up the hoistway far enough so that the
selector sensors cannot run off of the magnets at the extreme limit of travel
up past the top floor. See Figure 8 on page 2-24.
Floor Landing and Close Floor Leveling Magnet Installation

1. Position the car so that it is level and at the top landing.
selector box. See the following figures for this procedure:
Floor Landing - See Figure 6 on page 2-22.
Close Floor - See Figure 7 on page 2-23.
4. Position the template (814CH001) on the tape as follows:
a. The template top at the top of the selector box mark on the tape.
b. The sides of the template with the sides of the tape.
5. Place and center an 8" magnet in the right-hand slot of the template, and ensure
that the yellow stripe of the magnet (south pole) is facing out.

A close floor is defined as a floor with 4"- 16" of travel to the floor above it. The

template can be lifted over the nearby magnet to allow the installation of the "close
landing" magnet.
6. After installation, verify the position of the magnet.
a. The magnet top is 33/4" below the top of the selector box mark.
b. The magnet side is 1/2" from the edge of the tape side.
7. Repeat the above steps for each floor—except when performing step 5 (above),
a close floor's 8" magnet would be placed on the left-hand slot of the template
with the yellow stripe of the magnet (south pole) facing out. The top landing
always uses the right-hand slot of the template.

Magnet Placement
(continued)
To top of hoistway
and top tape mount
Section A-A
No Stripe note the difference Yellow Stripe
(North Pole) (South Pole)
Slowdown Directional
Magnet(s)
A A Mark the tape at the
Limit Magnet(s)
top of selector box.
½" ½"
Car Side of Selector Tape 6¼"
Selector Box
Start placement of directional
limit magnets 6¼" below
the tape mark at the top
of the selector box.
Start placement of bottom of terminal

slowdown magnets T inches below the
tape mark at the top of selector box.
T
Contract Speed Dimension T # of Magnets
(fpm) (inches) End to End
0 - 75 17½ 4
76-100 25½ 5
101-125 30½ 5
126-150 35½ 6
151-200 43½ 7
Note: The magnets on this sheet

are placed on the back side of the
tape, the side opposite the car side. To bottom tape mount
and broken tape switch
Figure 4 - Top Terminal Slowdown and Directional Limits

Magnet Placement
(continued)
To top of hoistway
and top tape mount
Start placement of top of terminal
ADJUSTMENT
slowdown magnets D inches above the
tape mark at the top of selector box.
D Mark the tape at the
top of the selector box.
Contract Speed Dimension D # of Magnets
(fpm) (inches) End to End
0 - 75 start 1" below mark 3
76-100 5 4
101-125 10 5
126-150 15 5
9¼"
151-200 23 6
Note: The magnets on this sheet

are placed on the back side of the
tape, the side opposite the car side.
Start placement of directional

limit magnets 9¼" below the
Selector Box tape mark at the top
of the selector box.
B B
Section B-B
Yellow Stripe
(South Pole)
Slowdown Directional
Magnet(s) Limit Magnet(s)
½" ½"
Car Side of Selector Tape

Use alignment tool (850PE1) for
side-to-side alignment of rear magnets To bottom tape mount
and broken tape switch
Figure 5 - Bottom Terminal Slowdown and Directional Limits

Magnet Placement
(continued)
Mark the tape at the top of the selector box.
3¾"
½"
Selector Box

Place 8" magnet

here with yellow
C C stripe facing out.
Position the
template on
the tape.
Section C-C ½"
Car Side of Selector Tape Yellow Stripe

(South Pole)
Figure 6 - Floor Landing Leveling Magnet Installation

Magnet Placement
(continued)
Mark the tape at the top of the selector box.
ADJUSTMENT
3¾"
½"
Selector Box
D D
Place 8" magnet

here with yellow
stripe facing out.
Position the
template on
the tape.
½" Section D-D
Close Floor
Leveling Magnet Typical Leveling Magnet
Yellow Stripe Car Side of Selector Tape
(South Pole)
Figure 7 - Close Floor Leveling Magnet Installation

Magnet Placement
(continued)
Requirement: The selector cannot be moved past the Terminal Slowdown or the Directional
Limit at the extreme limits of car travel. End to End Stacking Gap
1. Add additional magnets to the ends of Terminal Slowdown & Directional Limit Magnets. When installing multiple
2. Evenly divide additional magnets (from the chart) between each track of magnets. magnets end to end, make
3. Stack the magnets end to end. See End To End Stacking Gap (right). sure there is no gap
between the magnets.
Gaps may cause controller
and operational problems.
Top Selector Sensors Bottom Selector Sensors

Add Magnets Here Bottom Terminal Slowdown
and Directional Magnets
Note: The magnets on

this sheet are placed
on the back side of the
tape, the side opposite
the car side.
Top Terminal Slowdown

and Directional Magnets Add Magnets Here
Figure 8 - Extreme Travel Limit Magnet Installation

Adjustment Section Preliminary Setup for Automatic Operation
Preliminary Setup for Automatic Operation

Before starting a hoistway setup, complete the following items:
1. Door operator adjustments. See the appropriate door operator component
manual for this job.
2. Mechanical setup.
ADJUSTMENT
3. Gate switch (CDCF, CDCR) and limit setting (DOL, DCL - DOL and DCL are always
required for Automatic Operation, regardless of door operator type).
4. Card configuration and setup.
5. Verify that the car stops on the directional magnets 1 - 11/2" out of the terminal
landings.

• Before the car can run on Automatic Operation, the selector must scan (count)

the number of selector tape holes between floors.
• Any time a leveling magnet or directional limit magnet is moved, the hoistway
must be scanned again.
Hoistway Scan Through the Startup Wizard

The Startup Wizard sets up and configures all CAN nodes, performs a hoistway scan,
and executes job archive functions. Upon successful completion, the system will be
on Automatic Operation and ready for final valve adjustments. Previously, the CAN
nodes were configured. It is not necessary to duplicate those steps at this time,
unless there was incorrect CAN loading or bad nodes at the time of the original
configuration. It will not cause any harm to repeat the steps, and the following
procedure will complete the hoistway scan.
1. From Inspection Operation, place the car at, or above, the first landing.
2. Access the UIT.
3. Set the close floor adjustment. A close floor is defined as a floor with 4"- 16" of
travel to the floor above it.
a. If no close floor is present on this job, continue to step 4.
b. If system has a close floor, set P12=1.
Block Select Adjustments> Adjust Car/Group> Position System> P12.
4. Place all switches in the RUN or AUTOMATIC position (Pit Stop, Fireman's Stop,
Emergency Exit, SOS, Car Top Inspection Stop, etc.).
5. On the IOF Card, place the following switches in the Ready To Run on DOOR
DISCONNECT position:
• Car Door Bypass: OFF (DN)
• Hoistway Door Bypass: OFF (DN)
• Stop Switch: RUN (UP)
• Inspection Switch: NORMAL (UP)
• Door Disconnect Switch: Door Disconnect (UP)

Preliminary Setup for Automatic Operation Adjustment Section
Hoistway Scan Through the Startup Wizard

(continued)
6. Press UP or DOWN to scroll to the Startup Wizard.
7. Press ENTER, and then press UP.
Reminder: Before starting a hoistway scan, the door operator limits (DCL, DOL) must be
correctly adjusted.
8. Repeatedly press UP until the UIT displays Auto Hoistway Scan.
9. Press ENTER to scan the hoistway, and the UIT displays Auto Hoistway Scan.
The Auto Hoistway Scan will automatically run the car at leveling speed to the bottom
directional limit, and then up to the top directional limit, scanning the hoistway tape to
learn the floor levels. If the hoistway scan was successful, the car should have leveled
down into the top terminal landing.
a. If the hoistway scan was not successful, verify and correct magnet placement and
orientation.
• Leveling speed = 8-12 FPM.
• Gate/Lock circuits are not opening up during the run.
• Direction limits should not exceed 11/2" from the terminal landing.
• The appropriate NTS and LV I/Os must be active when on DL.
• The proper polarity of each magnet must be used.
b. To view learned floor levels, scroll to Commands > Commands Common >FCP.
10. The UIT displays Write to Flash, and this function saves all settings and values to the
CPU’s card memory. Press ENTER to perform this operation.
11. When NEXT TEST? displays, press ENTER and the UIT displays Save Job to USB. This
action archives the job’s controller CPU files to a USB memory stick.
a. Install the manufacturing-provided USB flash drive included with the job.
b. Press ENTER to perform this operation, and the UIT displays Backing Software.
c. When the UIT displays Backup Complete, press ENTER and then press DOWN to
exit the Startup Wizard.
d. On the IOF Card, place the door disconnect switch in the OFF position.
Door Setup and Final Adjustments

See the appropriate door operator component manual.

Adjustment Section I-2/I-3 Valve - Final Adjustments
I-2/I-3 Valve - Final Adjustments

Vertical Express power units have the manufacturing presets of the valve adjustments attached to the inside of the
controller. The preset values ensure movement of the car, and also reduce final adjustment time. Perform these
adjustments in the order given because they affect each other. For valves by other manufacturers, see the
manufacturer's product manual.
Before starting this section, verify that the Preliminary I-2/I-3 Valve Setup has
ADJUSTMENT
been performed. See the I-2/I-3 Valve component manual.
To be adjusted, the I-2/I-3 Valve requires a minimum static system pressure of

90 PSI.
Tank Return Line
Up Start Manual Lowering Valve

Adjustment
Low Pressure Lowering and Leveling

Adjustment Speed Adjustment
Up Leveling
Adjustment
Down Slowdown
Adjustment
High Pressure
Relief
Down Stop
Adjustment
Up Stop Up Slowdown Down Start

Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment
Figure 9 - I-2/I-3 Valve Details

I-2/I-3 Valve - Final Adjustments Adjustment Section
Valve Adjustment Up Section
Use the UIT to monitor the speed for leveling or high speed.
• Block Select > Real Time Motion > Speed
• Block Select > Real Time Motion > Quick Commands > Show Stabilized Leveling
The controller requires positive valve stops for reliable operation. If the valve stop
is adjusted too soft, it will result in operational issues.
Up Slowdown and Up Leveling Speed

The Up Slowdown adjustment screw is a sensitive adjustment. Use small increments to

change the adjustment. See Figure 9 on page 2-27.
1. Use the UIT to verify or set the selector slowdown point adjustments, P17 and P18,
per the job’s top speeds and Table 3 on page 2-36. For slowdown interactions related
to stabilized leveling, see the I-2/I-3 Valve Reference on page 5R-7.
2. Verify that the car is empty.
3. Place controller on Automatic Operation, and send the car to the lowest landing.
4. Run the car to the floor above, and observe the leveling zone.
5. Adjust the Up Slowdown for 3–4 inches of stabilized leveling, as verified with the UIT,
"Show Stabilized Leveling."
Up Slowdown: Adjust for 3–4 inches of Leveling

Shorten Leveling Zone
IN (cw) Increase Leveling Speed
Softer Up Slowdown
Each time the Up Slowdown Adjuster is changed, the Up Leveling Speed must be
rechecked.
6. Run the car on Inspection Operation, and adjust the Up Leveling. The leveling speed
should be 10-12 FPM. Use the controller’s UIT (not logged in) to display the car speed.
Up Leveling: 10-12 FPM

Increase Leveling Speed
IN (cw)
Softer Up Slowdown

Valve Adjustment Up Section

(continued)
When operating the car from the controller, ensure all safety precautions are
followed.
7. Place the car on Automatic Operation.
8. Determine the stabilized leveling zone. The stabilized leveling does vary some
ADJUSTMENT
between runs with the I-2/I-3 Valve.
a. Note the average of 5 runs.
b. Adjust the Up Slowdown and Up Leveling speed (as necessary) to achieve
an average of 3-4 inches of Up Stabilized Leveling and 10-12 FPM of level-
ing speed.
Up Stop and Up Start Because Up Stop affects Up Start, Up Stop must be adjusted first.
Recommended = Minimum 1 turn more Up Start than Up Stop.
1. Adjust Up Stop for a soft but positive stop. See Figure 9 on page 2-27.
2. Adjust Up Start for a smooth but positive start.
3. Check to be certain full up speed is reached on a one-floor run, which may

require Up Start to be more positive; this does not apply to short floors (4-16
inches).
4. Slightly alter Up Slowdown to achieve optimum performance, if necessary.
Up Stop Up Start
IN (cw)
Stop Softer Start Smoother
Valve Adjustment Down Section

To avoid damage to the piston face and seat, never turn the Down Lowering
and Leveling Speed Adjustment unless the car is in motion or resting on the
buffers.
Lowering Speed (Down Fast Speed)
1. Place the car on Automatic Operation at the top floor.
2. Use the controller’s UIT (not logged in) to display the car speed.


(continued)
3. Set the lowering speed while the car is in motion during an Up or Down run.
a. Turn the Lowering Speed adjustment in one-half turn increments. See Figure 9 on
page 2-27.
b. After each adjustment, leave the flat end of the screw pointed 45 degrees to the
tank return line.
c. Run the car to confirm the correct Down High Speed as displayed on the con-
troller’s UIT home screen.
Lowering Speed
One-half Turn Increments
OUT (ccw)
Increase Lowering Speed
If no speed change occurs with one full turn on the lowering speed adjuster, DO
NOT CONTINUE TO TURN IT OUT. Ensure the DN Start adjustment is turned out at
least one turn more than the DN Stop adjustment; should the issue remain, refer
to the troubleshooting section of the valve component manual.
Down Leveling Speed and Down Stop
The Down Leveling Speed and the Down Stop adjustments must be performed together
since Down Stop affects Down Leveling Speed. Down Leveling Speed, however, does not
affect Down Stop.
1. Place the controller on Inspection Operation.
2. Adjust Down Stop for a positive stop. See Figure 9 on page 2-27.
To avoid damage to the piston face and seat, never turn the Down Lowering and
Leveling Speed adjustment unless the car is in motion or resting on the buffers.
3. Adjust the Down Leveling Speed to 10–12 FPM.
4. Tighten the locknut on the Down Leveling Speed adjustment.
5. Re-check the Down Leveling Speed.
Down Stop
Stop Softer
IN (cw)
Down Leveling Speed
Less than one-quarter turn increments
OUT (ccw)


(continued)
Down Start 1. Place the controller on Automatic Operation.
2. Adjust the Down Start to obtain a smooth start. Ensure that the car achieves full
speed on a one-floor run. If not, make Down Start more positive. See Figure 9 on
page 2-27.
ADJUSTMENT
Down Start
IN (cw) Start Smoother
Down Slowdown Make the Down Slowdown adjustment in very small increments as soon as a change
is observed in the leveling zone. The car will overshoot the landing if the adjustment
is turned out too far.
Down Slowdown
Shorten Leveling Zone
OUT (ccw) Increase Leveling Speed
Softer Up Slowdown
1. Turn Down Slowdown out in small increments until the car has a leveling zone of
3–4 inches. See Figure 9 on page 2-27.
2. Determine the stabilized leveling zone. The stabilized leveling does vary some
between runs with the I-2/I-3 Valve.
a. Note the average of 5 runs.
b. Adjust the Down Slowdown and Down Leveling speed (as necessary) to
achieve an average of 3-4 inches of Down Stabilized Leveling and 10-12
FPM of leveling speed.
3. Run the car down on Inspection Operation to recheck down leveling speed, and
readjust Down Leveling, if necessary, for 10–12 FPM.

• It may be necessary to slightly alter the point in the hoistway where the

slowdown is initiated to achieve optimum valve and car performance, P17
(Up) and P18 (Down).
• For slowdown interactions related to stabilized leveling, see the I-2/I-3 Valve
Reference on page 5R-7.
Floor Stop Adjustment - Master Floor
This procedure applies to three-stop jobs and higher, and verifies that the valve is
stopping the car at the master floor the identical way in both directions. Do not worry
about floor level accuracy in this procedure, because the floor levels will be adjusted
in the Floor Position & Leveling Magnet Adjustment on page 2-34.
1. Select a master floor close to the middle of elevator travel.

Valve Adjustment
(continued)
2. Run the empty car on Automatic Operation up into the master floor. Note where the
car sill is in relation to the master floor hatch sill.
3. Run the empty car on Automatic Operation down into the master floor. Note where the
car sill is in relation to the master floor hatch sill.
4. Achieve a valve stop that results in the same final car location in both travel directions.
To avoid damage to the piston face and seat, never turn the Down Lowering and
Leveling Speed Adjustment unless the car is in motion or resting on the buffers.
How to change the leveling speeds for the appropriate travel direction.
• Increase the leveling speed - To increase car momentum and put the car further in
its travel direction upon the stop.
• Decrease the leveling speed - To decrease the car momentum and shorten the final
resting place of the car in its travel direction.
DO NOT exceed 14 FPM maximum for empty car leveling speeds.
The UP and DOWN stop adjustments need to be firm so that the stop can be felt slightly (a
soft but noticeable bump at the stop), as this prevents fluid temperature-based variations
in performance and allows the control system to achieve increased car level positioning
control.
Relevel Check - All Jobs
1. Place the empty car on Automatic Operation at the master floor or at the top floor of a
two-stop job.
2. Force an UP relevel, and verify that the control system and the valve place the car at
floor level.
a. On the I-2/I-3 Valve, slowly turn the Manual Lowering Valve (t-handle) counter-
clockwise (ccw) to open, allow the car to lower slightly, then quickly turn the valve
clockwise (cw) to close.
b. Ensure that the car went low enough: >1/2" with P19 & P22 at default value.
• If the car did not go low enough: Troubleshoot the Manual Lowering Valve to
identify the problem, and repeat the relevel check until correct.
• If the car went low enough: The motor and valve should energize and
place the car back at floor level.

Performance Check with Full Load
1. Place a capacity load on the car.
2. Run the car on Automatic Operation, and the check performance at all floors. All
valve functions will become firmer at upper landings. If adjustments are
necessary, it will affect the empty car performance.
• The Down Leveling Speed will increase and the Down Leveling Zone will be
ADJUSTMENT

shorter. It may be necessary to change the Down Slowdown adjustment to be
certain there are at least 2 inches of leveling.
• If necessary, turn IN on the Down Slowdown to increase the leveling zone.
• The Up Leveling Speed will increase. The Up Leveling Zone will change between
no load and full load. Do not change any adjustments made with no load if there
is at least 1 inch of Up Leveling Zone with a full load.
• If necessary, turn OUT on the Up Slowdown adjustment to increase the Up Level-
ing Zone.
3. Verify that the car is obtaining full speed in both directions on a one-floor run.
4. Record the working pressure in the up direction. The working pressure value will
be used in the next procedure.
5. Remove the capacity load from the car.
Final Relief Pressure with Full Load
1. Place the controller on Inspection Operation, close the line shut-off valve,
and set Z44 = 10 seconds.
2. Start the pump, and read the relief pressure.
Do Not adjust the relief pressure to 150%, as allowed by code, unless the
entire hydraulic system has been replaced.
3. Add 25% to the working pressure recorded in step 4 of the previous procedure,
and set the relief valve to relieve at this new pressure value.
4. Stop the power unit, and tighten the locknut on the relief pressure adjustment.
5. Re-check the relief pressure.

Immediately stop the power unit if the pressure exceeds 625 PSI.
6. Open line shut-off valve, place car on Automatic Operation, and reset Z44 = 2.

Floor Position & Leveling Magnet Adjustment Adjustment Section
Floor Position & Leveling Magnet Adjustment

Before proceeding with the floor leveling adjustments, the valve must be fully
adjusted.
1. Perform a floor survey to determine if the car is level at each floor.
a. Run the car into one landing, and use the UIT to verify that the POS: and REF: DPP
counts are the same.
UIT: Real Time Motion > Motion/Position
b. Verify that the car sill is level with the hoistway sill for that landing. If the DPP
counts and the sills are not level, correct the 8" leveling magnet's position.
c. Repeat step 1 for each landing.
2. If any floor leveling magnet been repositioned, perform a new hoistway scan and
repeat step 1.
3. When the floor leveling magnet placement is correct, attach each magnet with two
small beads of silicon caulk. See Figure 10.
ЯΗ
ЯΗ Magnet ЯΗ
½"
Tape
Guides
Attach all magnets Magnet

by gluing each magnet
with two small applications of silicon caulk. ЯΗ
Note: When applying the silicon caulk, be
careful not to extend more than Я" past the
magnet. This provides running clearance
between the glue and the tape guides to
prevent the glue from touching the guides.
½"
Cover
8" Magnet TSMC Card
Selector Tape Guides
ЯΗ TSAC Card
Car Side
Top Down View Showing Tape Selector Assembly with Tape, Magnets, and Magnet Glue
Figure 10 - Glue the Floor Magnets

Adjustment Section Terminal Slowdown Check
Terminal Slowdown Check

1. Confirm the P17 and P18 slowdown position counts, based on job speed. See
Table 3 on page 2-36 for the proper values and for all steps in this procedure.
2. Adjust the terminal slowdown magnets so that they activate 2–4" after the
selector slowdown.
ADJUSTMENT
Example
Both up and down car speeds are 100 FPM. Table 3 shows that the up selector
slowdown is 939 counts (each count = 1/40"). Therefore, the up terminal slow-
down magnet should activate 18–20" before the landing. The down selector
slowdown is 683 counts, so the down terminal slowdown magnet should acti-
vate 12–14" before the landing.
Verify Proper Function of the UP Terminal Slowdown Magnets via the UIT
1. In the UIT, scroll to Block Select Adjustments > Adjust Car/Group > Position Sys-
tem > P17, and press ENTER to edit the value.
2. Press UP or DOWN to adjust P17 to one half of the recommended value from
Table 3 on page 2-36.
3. Place the car at a floor below the top terminal landing. This action will allow the
car to achieve contract speed in the up direction.
4. Run the car to the top terminal landing.

• NTST should activate, slow the car down, and stop the car within door zone.
• The controller should log faults (981,2801, 1062, etc.) showing the NTS
system was activated.

a. If the car does not stop within the door zone, use a marker that will not
damage the selector tape to mark the bottom edge of the slowdown mag-
net’s current location.
b. Use the alignment tool as a guide, and slide the slowdown magnets
down in 1" increments. Repeat until the car stops within the door zone.
5. Restore P17 to the value indicated in Table 3. If the slowdown magnets were
repositioned to achieve proper operation, add 43 to the value of P17 for each
inch the magnets were moved.
6. Scroll to Block Select Adjustments > Adjustment Car/Group > Car Adjustments >
WRT, and issue a WRT Command to save the adjustments.
7. Attach each magnet in its final location with two small beads of silicone caulk.

Terminal Slowdown Check Adjustment Section
Verify Proper Function of the DOWN Terminal Slowdown Magnets via the UIT
1. In the UIT, scroll to Block Select Adjustments > Adjust Car/Group > Position System >
P18, and press ENTER to edit the value.
2. Press UP or DOWN to adjust P18 to one half of the recommended value from Table 3.
3. Place the car at the first non-close floor above the bottom terminal landing. This action
will allow the car to achieve contract speed in the down direction.
4. Run the car to the bottom terminal landing.

• NTSB should activate, slow the car down, and stop the car within the door zone.
• The controller should log faults (981,2801, 1062, etc.) showing the NTS system
was activated.

a. If the car does not stop within the door zone, use a marker that will not damage
the selector tape to mark the bottom edge of the slowdown magnet’s current
location.
b. Use the alignment tool as a guide, and slide the slowdown magnets down in
1" increments. Repeat until the car stops within the door zone.
5. Restore P18 to the value indicated in Table 3. If the slowdown magnets had to be
repositioned to achieve proper operation, add 43 to the value of P18 for each inch the
magnets were moved.
6. Scroll to Block Select Adjustments > Adjustment Car/Group > Car Adjustments > WRT,
and issue a WRT Command to save the adjustments.
7. Attach each magnet in its final location with two small beads of silicone caulk. See
Figure 10 on page 2-34.
Car Up Adjustment Down Adjustment

Speed Slowdown Slowdown
Distance Distance
(FPM) Count Count
50 11" 470 8" 342
75 16" 683 12" 512
100 22" 939 16" 683
125 28" 1195 22" 939
150 34" 1451 28" 1195
175 42" 1792 34" 1451
200 50" 2134 42" 1792
Table 3 - Selector Slowdown Distance

Adjustment Section Final Adjustments
Final Adjustments
ESP200 Overload
Before the elevator is turned over to the customer, overloads must undergo
this procedure.
ADJUSTMENT
1. Run the car up with a full load, and measure the stabilized running current at
each sensing loop.

Take the stabilized running current measurements with a clamp-on AC ammeter

connected directly below the sensing loops.
2. Calculate the full load amps adjustment. The full load amps adjustment equals
the highest reading in Step 1 + 10%.
The full load amps adjustment must not be set outside the calibration range
on the overload faceplate. To do so may prevent the overload from tripping
and may also damage the motor.
3. Set the full load amps adjustment dial equal to the value calculated in Step 2.
See Figure 11.
4. Verify that the car will run the entire length of the hoistway with a full load.
Full Load Amps

Adjustment Dial
Figure 11 - ESP200 Overload Adjustment

Final Adjustments Adjustment Section
Final Adjustments
(continued)
Electronic Starter
MOTOR STATUS
STOPPED
SCROLL UP
EXIT MENU
OR SAVE ENTER MENU
SCROLL DOWN
Electronic Starter Display

• The electronic starter displays MOTOR STATUS STOPPED when the system is normal.

Reset the starter if it reads otherwise and, before continuing, correct any problem indi-
cated on the display.
• The starter display reverts to MOTOR STATUS STOPPED after 5 minutes of inactivity.
1. Verify that the Starting Amps = the Motor Nameplate Amps x 3 (Mfg. default).
Optional: 2 x FLA = minimum setting, 4.5 x FLA = maximum setting.
2. From the MOTOR STATUS menu, press . The STATUS menu displays.
3. Press  twice to display the PARAMETERS menu.
4. From the PARAMETERS menu, press  once. STARTING AMPS displays.

5. Set the starting amps value equal to three times the nameplate FLA.
a. Press  once to access the value.
b. Press  or  to adjust the value of the flashing digit. Press  to move to the
next digit.
c. Press  to exit the starting amps parameter.
A prompt to ACCEPT or REJECT the change displays. Press  to accept or  to reject
and correct the parameter.
6. Press  once and OVERLOAD AMPS displays.

a. If the value is correct, skip to Step 8.
b. If the value is not correct, continue to Step 7.

Adjustment Section Operational Adjustments
Electronic Starter
(continued) 7. Press  once to access the value.
a. Press  or  to adjust the value of the flashing digit.
b. Press  to move to the next digit.
8. Press  to exit to the PARAMETERS Menu.

A prompt to ACCEPT or REJECT the change appears. Press to accept,
or  to reject and correct the parameter.
ADJUSTMENT
Operational Adjustments
Configure the THY02 Card
The THY02 Card, powered by 24VDC, is a receive-only device. See Figure 12.
• REC+ and REC- are for 485 communication protocol.
• CANH and CANL are for CAN communication protocol used with ICON32.
1. Set the S1 Dip Switch #3 to the ON position.
2. Set the controller adjustment O43=9 for the Car CAN Channel (CCL/CCH).
3. Issue a WRT Command.
4. Press RST on the CPUC Card.
Dip
Function
Switch
ON = Self-test Mode. Unit ignores data link inputs. 1
ON = Use 50 kHz CAN link.

3
OFF = Use 100 kHz CAN link.
ON = Use MAMMI Message 8 as play strobe for voice. 4

ON = Unit display alternately shows lower two ASCII characters of
5
floors and messages. When displaying a message, “100” LED is lit.
ON = Unit display shows floor position number instead of ASCII
6
characters.
ON with EEPROM installed = Activate the passing chime when the bit is
7
set in EEPROM for that floor position number.
ON = Activate floor number redundancy (need same data twice). 8
Figure 12 - THY02 Card and Dip Switch Functions

Operational Adjustments Adjustment Section
Additional Operational Adjustments
Verify the following settings:
1. TIM set correctly.
2. DAT set correctly.
3. L10 - L34 for lobby request (parking options) - some jobs ship with parking enabled.
4. Multistage jacks.
a. JRT set to desired time.
b. O29 = 6-10 seconds.
c. O44 - # motor starts to trigger a jack resync.
d. O30 - Jack resync interval in days (1-3).
e. O32 - Jack resync door.
5. Fire service.
a. F10 - Main fire return landing.
b. F11 - Alternate fire return landing.
6. Set Hoistway Access (optional).

• Z38 - Hoistway Access Bottom Floor Door Selection
• Z39 - Hoistway Access Top Floor Door Selection
• O11- Hoistway Access Bottom Zone
• O21- Hoistway Access Top Floor
• O22- Hoistway Access Top Zone
• Configure the Safety Processor
• Issue TECC Command

Adjustment Section Operational Adjustments
Save Parameters and Backup Job Software
1. Place the controller inspection switch in the INSP position.
2. Access the UIT.
3. Press UP or DOWN to scroll to the Startup Wizard.
ADJUSTMENT
4. Press ENTER to select the Startup Wizard, and then press UP.
5. Press UP until Write to Flash displays.
6. Press ENTER, and press ENTER again, and the UIT displays Save Job To USB.
7. Insert the USB flash drive for the job, and press ENTER. The CPU will
create a backup folder in the tke folder, and save the job software. This
process will take several minutes.
8. When the process is complete, press ENTER.
9. Press DOWN.
10. Place the controller inspection switch in the NORMAL position.
11. Return the car to service.

Operational Adjustments Adjustment Section
This page
intentionally
left blank.

DIAGNOSTICS SECTION
DIAGNOSTICS SECTION
Diagnostics Section Contents
Contents
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
No Known Application Rule I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Control System Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
SP Fault Codes - Safety Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
NP Fault Codes - NTSD Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
WPT Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Contents Diagnostics Section
This page
intentionally
left blank.

Diagnostics Section Adjustments
Adjustments
Adj Unit Range Definition
Code Blue Door Hold Time - The time the doors will remain opened at the code blue desig-
nated floor. If, after this time, the Hospital Service switch has not been activated, the doors
C10 sec. 0–900
will close and the car will return to normal operation.
Note: If the AST timer expires before CBH, the car will return to Automatic Operation.
Code Blue Response Priority 1-15 - Use this adjustment to establish priorities for the cars
responding to Code Blue Operation.
C11-C25 cars 0–ncars
C11 is the highest priority car followed by C12, etc.
A zero (0) for this adjustment turns OFF the Code Blue Operation for the car.
C26 — 0–1 Group Code Blue Operation - Set to 1 to enable.
Limited Door Reversal Type
Values:
DIAGNOSTICS
D10 — 0–2 0 = Disabled
1 = Active with EE only
2 = Active with SE or EE
Nudging Enable
Values:
0 = Disable
D11 — 0–2
1 = Enable
2 = Enable with DOB override
The door open button causes the doors to fully reopen during nudging.
Front Door Type
Values:
0 = No Door
1 = Electronic Door Operator using 6300PY_ Card
2 = Discrete Door Operator
3 = Freight Door (freight doors with auto open and auto close)
4 = Freight Manual (freight doors with no auto open, no auto close, no door times, and no
D12 — 0–8 door watchdog protection timer)
5 = Freight Auto Open (freight doors with auto open only, no door watchdog protection
timer)
6 = Freight Auto Close (freight doors with auto close only, and with door
watchdog protection timer)
7 = Electronic Door Operator with CAN serial link. ICON32 with UDC (6300PA) Card or
LD-16 Door Operator
8 = Electronic Door Operator with RS-485 serial link
Rear Door Type
Values:
0 = No Door
1 = Electronic Door Operator using 6300PY_ Card
2 = Discrete Door Operator
3 = Freight Door (freight doors with auto open and auto close)
4 = Freight Manual (freight doors with no auto open, no auto close, no door times, and no
D13 — 0–8 door watchdog protection timer)
5 = Freight Auto Open (freight doors with auto open only, no door watchdog protection
timer)
6 = Freight Auto Close (freight doors with auto close only, and with door
watchdog protection timer)
7 = Electronic Door Operator with CAN serial link ICON32 with UDC (6300PA) Card or
LD-16 Door Operator
8 = Electronic Door Operator with RS-485 serial link
This manual shows only the parameters that have an operational relevance to the ICON32. The UIT may have
additional parameters available, which should not effect the controller operation.

Adjustments Diagnostics Section
Adj (cont.) Unit Range Definition (cont.)

Safety Edge Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors will stay open
D14 0.1 sec. 0–100
after the safety edge is activated.
Electric Eye Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors will stay open
D15 0.1 sec. 4–50
after the electric eye is activated.
Door Open Button Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors will stay
D16 0.1 sec. 0–100
open after the door open push button activation.
Door Hold Button Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors will stay
D17 sec. 5–900
open after the door hold push button activation.
Open High Speed Time - This adjustment sets the amount of time delay after the doors
D18 0.1 sec. 0–40
start the opening cycle with OD and before picking the OHS Relay.
Nudging Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time that the door must be held
D19 sec. 5-120
open before nudging is activated. See also: D11, D40, F23, Z16.
Door Reversal Time (optional) - If the electric eye remains active, this
adjustment is the length of time the doors will remain at the door reversal limit (DRL) switch
D20 0.1 sec. 0–60 before fully opening.
Note: To enable this feature, the limited door reversal type must be non-zero.
See also: D10
Front Door Watchdog Time - If the doors do not reach the door close limit before this timer
D21 0.1 sec. 0–600 expires, the system assumes the doors have failed. The doors will be reopened and
another close cycle attempted.
Rear Door Watchdog Time - If the doors do not reach the door close limit before this timer
D22 0.1 sec. 0–600 expires, the system assumes the doors have failed. The doors will then be reopened and
another close cycle attempted.
ADA Hall Call Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors stay open
D23 0.1 sec. 50–300
when answering hall calls with the ADA option enabled.
Car Call Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors stay open when
D24 0.1 sec. 1–300
answering car calls under normal operation.
Hall Call Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time the doors stay open when
D25 0.1 sec. 1–300
answering hall calls under normal operation.
Door Disconnect.
Values:
0 = The door disconnect feature is deactivated.
D26 — 0–2 1 = The door disconnect feature is active.
2 = Capture the car on door disconnect.
Note: "3" is not a user setting. D26 = 3 followed by WRT will reload the job configuration
file in order to recover elevator operation.
D27 — 0–1 ADA - Set to "1" to meet ADA legal requirements (USA).
Stuck Device Time - This adjustment sets the length of time a door opening device (such
D28 sec. 30–600
as the Door Open Button) must be active before it is recognized as being stuck.
D29 — 0–1 Extended Door Time Enable - To activate this feature, set adjustment D30.
Extended Door Time - This adjustment sets the length of time added to the standard door
D30 0.1 sec. 10–250
time when the car is at the Extended Door Time Landing.
D31 floor 1–nf Extended Door Time Landing.
Non-simultaneous Door Enable.
Values:
D34 — 0–1
0 = Disable non-simultaneous doors
1 = Enable non-simultaneous doors
Sabbath Door Hold Time - The time (in seconds) the doors will hold open at each floor
D38 sec. 3–120
when the car is operating on Sabbath Operation.


Freight Doors Present - Informs the system that the job has freight doors -
Values:
D42 — 0–1
0 = No freight doors
1 = Freight doors
Door Open Device Stuck Detection Disable - This adjustment, when set to 1, disables the
D43 — 0–1
detection for the door open device and the doors will remain open indefinitely.
Wittur Keeper Timeout - The controller will disable Close Door after this time, and the doors
will relax and disengage the clutch.
D47 sec. 0–1 Values:
0 = Disable (standard operation - provide door close while in motion).
1 = Enable
Emergency Power Type.
Values:
0 = None.
1 = 10D-0C (Type 0) hydraulic battery lower and shutdown.
DIAGNOSTICS
2 = 10D-3/10D-4; pre A17-2008 (Type 3 or 4). Alternate Power.
E10 — 0-2
3 = 10D-0A (Type 1); PowerVator with traction.
4 = 10D-3/10D-4; A17-2008 (Type 3 or 4). Alternate Power.
5 = Not applicable.
6 = 10D-3/10D-4; A17 2016 (Type 3 or 4).
Note: Power cycle is required for changes to take effect.
Emergency Power Return Floor (Car) - During an Emergency Power return phase, this
E11 floor 1–nf
adjustment sets which floor the car will attempt a return to.
Emergency Power Door - For use with selective doors, this adjusts which door will open at
the return floor (when returning to landing).
E12 F/R 0–1f Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
Emergency Power Manual Select Time - When in manual select mode, this adjusts the time
E13 sec. 10–300
delay before the car is actually selected (Type-4 only).
Okay To Hold Doors Open on Emergency Power.
Values:
E14 — 0–1
0 = False
1 = True
Emergency Power Return Floor (Group) - During an Emergency Power return phase, this
E17 floors 1–nfloors
adjustment sets which floor the car will attempt a return to.
Maximum Elevators on Emergency Power - This is the maximum number of cars allowed to
E18 cars 1–ncars
run simultaneously on Emergency Power Operation.
Emergency Power Extended Lowering Time - Use this adjustment to set the time allowed
E19 min. 2–10
for cars to arrive at the emergency power floor.
Emergency Power Lowering - This adjustment sets the automatic lowering sequence for
E20-E34 ncars 0–ncars Emergency Power Operation.
Note: E20 would be the first elevator to lower, and E34 would be the last elevator to lower.
Emergency Power Run - This adjustment sets the automatic select to run sequence for
E35-E49 ncars 0–ncars Emergency Power Operation.
Note: E35 would be the first elevator to run, and E49 would be the last elevator to run.
Emergency Power Lower Timer - This adjustment sets the time for each group in the lower-
ing sequence.
E50 sec. 0–60
Note: If the groups are powered up simultaneously, the previous group has sufficient time
to initialize and begin to lower.
Emergency Power Auto Select Timer - If the groups are powered up on Emergency Power
E51 sec. 0–100 simultaneously, this adjustment sets the time for each group in the lowering sequence to
initialize and begin lowering.


Group Level Emergency Power.
E52 — 0–1 • Set to 1 = Enable ICON32 value.
• Set to 0 = Disable group emergency power features.
Main Fire Landing - Floor position number designated as the Main Fire Recall Floor. This
F10 floor 1–nf
should be set for the same floor where the Fire Phase 1 key switch is located.
F11 floor 1–nf Fire Alt Landing - Floor position number designated as the Alternate Fire Recall Floor.
Main Fire Landing Door - When in response to Phase 1 Fire Service, this adjusts which
door opens at the Main Fire Landing.
F12 F/R 0–1 Values:
0 = Front Door
1 = Rear Door
Fire Alt Landing Door - When in response to Phase 1 Fire Service, this adjusts which door
opens at the Alternate Fire Landing.
F13 F/R 0–1 Values:
0 = Front Door
1 = Rear Door
Fire Override Time - This is the time delay that must expire before Phase 1 Fire Service is
allowed to override attendant operated features such as
F14 sec. 0–60
Independent Service.
Note: This feature is not allowed to operate on some Fire Service types.
Fire Service Switch Type - Set this type of switch for a Secondary Phase 1 Fire Service
switch. The value to be entered must be dictated by the Fire Service type (F16) and the
provided hardware.
F15 — 0–2 Values:
0 = No Secondary Switch
1 = Two Position Secondary Switch
2 = Three Position Secondary Switch
Fire Service Type - This selection determines which type of Phase 1 and Phase 2 Fire
Service Operation will be provided.
Values: 17 = B44 – 2005
0 = No Fire Service 18 = EN81 – 2005
1 = ANSI/ASME – 1993 19 = ANSI 2007
2 = Chicago Building Code 20 = B44 – 2007
3 = California 21 = New York - 2003
4 =New York RS18 22 = ANSI - 2013
5 = Massachusetts 1998 23 = ANSI - 2016
6 = ANSI/ASME – 1998 24 = EN81-72 2015
F16 — 0–20
7 = Houston 1998 25 = Russia
8 = Michigan 1998, Detroit 26 = France
9 = B44 27 = Britain
10 = White Plains NY 28 = Switzerland
11 = ANSI/ASME – 2000 29 = DO NOT USE (EN8173_2016_NH)
12 = B44 – 2000 30 = Netherlands
13 = ANSI/ASME – 2004 31 = Belgium
14 = B44 – 2004 32 = EN8173 - 2016
15 = Korea 33 = DO NOT USE (Spain)
16 = ANSI – 2005
Hall Fire Door Open Time - This adjustment sets the value of the Phase 1 door open time
for special (Houston) Fire Service.
Notes:
F17 0.1 sec. 0–255 • Cars recalled to the fire floor on Phase 1, with corresponding doors held open, will close
the doors after this time delay.
• Additional door open push button (input FSDO) per car is required in the hall for this
operation so that the doors may be reopened on demand by fire personnel.


Phase 1 Safety Edge Operation - This adjustment determines how the safety edge and
door operation interact during Fire Service Phase 1.
Operation. This adjustment must be coordinated with applicable Fire Codes.
Values:
1 = The safety edge is inhibited (no door re-open from the safety edge), and the doors
F18 — 1–3
close at reduced door speed during Phase 1 Fire Service.
close at normal door speed during Phase 1 Fire Service.
3 = The safety edge is functional (doors will re-open from the safety edge), and the doors
Phase 2 Safety Edge Operation - This adjustment determines how the safety edge and
door operation interact during Fire Service Phase 2.
Operation. This adjustment must be coordinated with applicable Fire Codes.
Values:
F19 — 1–3
DIAGNOSTICS
close at reduced door speed during Phase 2 Fire Service.
3 = The safety edge is functional (doors will re-open from the safety edge), and the doors
Fire Lift - Use this adjustment to designate an elevator as a Fire Lift.
Note: This adjustment only applies to fire service types that require the
designation of Fire Lifts.
F20 — 0–1
Values:
0 = The elevator is not designated as a Fire Lift.
1 = The elevator is designated as a Fire Lift.
B44 Phase 2 Activation Location - Only use this adjustment for B44 Fire Service Operation.
Note: This adjustment will determine whether Phase 2 Operation is allowed to activate/
deactivate only at the main return landing, or activate/deactivate at the main or alternate
F21 — 0–1 return landing.
Values:
0 = Phase 2 can activate only at the main return landing.
1 = Phase 2 can activate/deactivate at main or the alternate return landing.
This adjustment will set the 1998 B44 Fire Service, Phase 2 return door speed.
Note: If F23=1, the door closes in response to the initial Phase 2 recall
activation done at nudging speed. This action occurs without regard to adjustment F19
(used to set up the safety edge operation and the door
F23 — 0–1
closing speed during Phase 2). See also: D11, D19, D40, Z16.
Values:
0 = The doors close at a speed determined by the F19 adjustment.
1 = The doors close at nudging speed.
This adjustment will set 2000 Fire Service (A17 & B44) Phase 2 recall floor.
Values:
F24 — 0–1
0 = Phase 2 recall will take the car to the main fire floor.
1 = Phase 2 recall will take the car to the current active fire floor.
This adjustment will set the Fire Service Return Indicator (Fire Hat).
Note: The F25 setting has no effect on the 2004 Fire Service. The Fire Hat light will remain
active while either Phase 1 or Phase 2 is active.
0 = The Fire Hat light is active during Phase 1 Recall and, where applicable, during Phase
2 Recall. The light will deactivate when the car arrives at the fire floor.
1 = The Fire Hat light will remain active while Phase 1 or Phase 2 is active.


This adjustment will set variations of Smoke Sensor Operation for Standard 2000 Fire Ser-
vice (A17 and B44).
Values:
0 = The Standard 2000 (A17 and B44) fire service sensor operation is active.
1 = The Maryland variation of 2000 fire service is active. Maryland allows the active recall
floor to be changed from the main landing to the alternate landing if the main landing
sensor is active, the secondary switch (if provided) is in the OFF position, and the pri-
mary switch is moved to the RESET position and then to the OFF position.
2 = The Ohio variation of 2000 fire service is active. Ohio allows the alternate landing recall
on Phase 1 to be overridden: place either the primary or secondary switch in the ON
F26 — 0–4
position and the car will move to the main landing. The car will revert to the alternate
landing recall if the primary switch and the secondary switch (if provided) are in the
OFF position and the main landing sensor is still active.
3 = The Massachusetts variation of 2000 fire service is active. Massachusetts allows the
alternate landing recall on Phase 1 to be overridden: place the primary switch in the
ON position and the secondary switch will be ignored if the main landing sensor is
active.
4 = The Manchester, NH variation of 2000 fire service is active. Manchester allows fire ser-
vice initiated by sensors to be deactivated: reset all sensors and no required switch
change is needed.
Group Fire Recall Landing – This adjustment sets the designated floor position number for
F31 floors 1-nfloors the Main Fire Recall Floor.
Note: This should be set to the floor location of the Phase 1 Fire Service Key Switch.
Group Alternate Fire Recall Floor - This is the designated floor position number for the
F32 floor 1–nfloors
Alternate Fire Landing.
Flash FSRI on FSE Activate First
Inhibit flashing of fire hat if FS PH1 is activated by some means other than machine room
or hoistway smoke sensor.
0 = Flash FSRI anytime the machine room smoke input is active.
1 = Only flash FSRI if machine room or hoistway smoke sensors are activated before other
FS PH1 activation means.
Homing Return Door 1 - This adjustment assigns which door will open at return floor 1
(when the landing has selective doors).
H11 F/R 0–1 Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear
Homing Return Landing 2 - This adjustment changes the floor the car returns to during car
H12 floor 1–nf
homing operation. To activate, use Input HM2.
0 = Front
1 = Rear
Homing Return Landing 3 - This adjustment changes the floor the car returns to during car
H14 floor 1–nf
homing operation. To activate, use Input HM3.
0 = Front
1 = Rear
Homing Door Time - This adjustment sets the door time used when at the return landing
H16 0.1 sec. 0–600
(during car homing operation).


Flooded Pit Sensor 1 Operation Return Floor - This adjustment sets the floor that the car
H17 floor 1–nf
goes to if the pit is flooded, sensor input FPS1.
Flooded Pit Sensor 1 Operation Return Door - This adjustment sets the side of doors that
cycle upon arrival at the return floor during Flooded Pit Operation, sensor input FPS1.
0 = Front
1 = Rear
Flooded Pit Sensor 2 Operation Return Floor - This adjustment sets the floor that the car
H19 floor 1–nf
goes to if the pit is flooded, sensor input FPS2.
Flooded Pit Sensor 2 Operation Return Door - This adjustment sets the side of doors that
cycle upon arrival at the return floor during Flooded Pit Operation, sensor input FPS2.
0 = Front
1 = Rear
Flooded Pit Door Open Time - This adjustment sets the door standing time used at the
DIAGNOSTICS
H21 sec. 0-30
return floor.
J10 pounds 500–65000 Capacity - The rated car capacity.
Car ID - The car number within a group, beginning with 1. Used by the software for identi-
J11 — 1–# of cars fication and I/O assignments. See ELD for the designator - used by programs and people
for identification. Note: Altering this value may cause some features to malfunction.
Car Communication Number.
Values:
J12 — 0–240
0 = The controller computes the comm number from the car and group number.
1-255 = Force to the selected comm number.
J13 — 1–8 Group ID - The group number within a multiple group network, beginning with 1.
Lobby Floor - This adjustment sets the lobby to the proper car opening (beginning with 1 =
J14 floor 1–nf bottom floor).
Note: This floor number may not be the building floor number.
Relevel on the Stop Switch - Permits a re-level with the in Car Stop Switch active and the
CST input not active; Does not permit a re-level for the Fireman's Stop Switch(es).
J19 — 0–1 Values:
0 = No releveling while the Emergency Stop Switch is thrown.
1 = Up releveling only while Emergency Stop Switch is thrown.
Stop Switch Type - This adjustment sets the value to the type of stop switch provided on
this installation.
J20 — 0–1 Values:
0 = Keyed stop switch.
1 = Public access stop switch.
Lobby Elevator Request - Number of cars requested to park at the lobby.
Values:
L10 cars 0–ncars
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Lobby - This adjustment sets the designated floor position number for the lobby floor, and
L12 floors 1–nfloors
is also used as the homing floor for the lobby elevator request.
Zone 1 Floor - The car stays at the last floor served for normal operation.
Notes:
• When parking is enabled and a car becomes free, it will be sent to one of the zone floors
L14 floors 1–nfloors
(after a time delay - L25).
• L14 through L19 allow for six different zone or parking floors.
• The number of zone floors used is set by L20.
L15 floors 1–nfloors Zone 2 Floor - See L14.


Number of Zones - The maximum number of zones or parking floors in the group.
Notes:
• If this number is set larger than the number of cars, the parking floors (or zone floors)
L20 zones 0–6
will be rotated on each assignment.
• This parameter is usually set to a value less than total number of cars.
See also: L14.
Park Free Time - This adjustment sets the amount of time the car must be free in order to
L25 2 sec. 0–60 zone.
See also: L14.
Motor Starter Type.
Values:
1 = Across Line - One Contactor
M10 — 1-5 2 = Across Line -Two Contactor
3 = Delta One Contactor
4 = Wye-Delta -Two Contactor
5 = Electronic
M11 0.1 sec. 0-20 Motor Starter Time - Wye-Delta interval timer value.
Valve Type - This adjustment sets the active solenoids during a high speed UP or DOWN
run.
Values:
1 = Up fast only, Down fast, and Down slow (tkE I-2/I-3 Valve)
2 = Up fast only, and Down fast only
M12 — 1-7
3 = Up fast and Up slow, Down fast only
4 = Up fast and Up slow, Down fast and Down slow (Maxton Valve)
5 = Dump valve, Down fast, and Down slow
6 = Dump valve, and Down fast only
7 = Electronic Valve
Restart Delay - This adjustment sets the amount of delay time from the end of one run until
M13 0.1 sec. 20-6000
the beginning of a new run (relevel runs do not count).
Motor Stop Time (previous label, TMS Timer) - This adjustment sets the time delay
M14 0.1 sec. 1-30
between the Up Valve deactivation and the motor deactivation.
Landing Timer - If the car run time exceeds this value, the car is shutdown and requires a
M79 min. 0-60
manual reset or power cycle.
Anti-nuisance Car Calls - This adjustment sets the number of car calls answered (without
O10 calls 0-nf
passenger detection) before activating the anti-nuisance operation.
Hoistway Access Bottom Zone - When the car runs on hoistway access, this zone is the
distance (in inches) above the bottom hoistway access floor.
O11 inches 0–168
Note: Modifying this parameter requires SP & NP Configuration.
See also: O21, O22, Z38, and Z39.
Car Cycle Floor 1 - This adjustment sets the car cycle for floor 1, and the car will cycle
O12 floor 0–nf
between floors 1 and 2. To deactivate this feature, set either O12 or O13 to 0 (zero).
Car Cycle Floor 2 - This adjustment sets the car cycle for floor 2, and the car will cycle
O13 floor 0–nf
between floors 1 and 2. To deactivate this feature, set either O12 or O13 to 0 (zero).
Hall Independent Return Floor - This adjustment sets the return landing of the car (when
O14 floor 0–nf
Hall Independent Service is activated).
Hall Independent Return Door - This adjustment assigns which door will open at the return
landing (when the landing has with selective doors).
O15 F/R 0–1 Values:
0 = Front
1 = Rear


Low Oil Door - During low oil operation, this adjustment sets the selective doors to open
when returning to a landing.
0 = Front
1 = Rear
Low Oil Timer - This adjustment sets how long motor is allowed to run before activating the
O17 sec. 20-255 low oil operation.
Note: If the floor-to-floor run time exceeds the timer value, the low oil operation actives.
Massachusetts Medical Floor - This adjustment sets which landing the car returns to when
Massachusetts Medical Service is activated.
O18 floor 0–nf
Note: If a landing does not have front/rear openings (based on the value of O19), the
adjustment will be refused.
Massachusetts Medical Door - This adjustment sets the selective door to open landing
return during Massachusetts Medical Recall Service Operation.
DIAGNOSTICS
0 = Front
1 = Rear
Independent Overrides Lockouts - This adjustment (when enabled) allows the Car Inde-
pendent Service to override the Car Call Lockouts.
O20 — 0–1 Values:
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Hoistway Access Top Floor - This adjustment sets which landing is designated for the top
O21 floor 2–nf landing of hoistway access operation.
See also:O11, O22, Z38, and Z39.
Hoistway Access Top Zone - When the car runs on hoistway access, this zone is the dis-
tance (in inches) above the top hoistway access floor.
O22 inches 0–168
See also: O11, O22, Z38, and Z39.
Viscosity Return Floor - This adjustment sets which return floor is used for viscosity opera-
O23 floor 1–nf
tion.
Transfer Calls on Door Close - This adjustment (if enabled) allows call transfers to occur
while the doors are closing.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Non-Interference Time - This adjustment sets the delay (in seconds) after the doors close,
O28 sec. 5–60
and before SAPB calls can be latched. This time delay gives priority to car calls.
Jack Resync Lower Time - This adjustment sets the time allowed for a jack resync to be
O29 sec. 5–30
completed once the car reaches the bottom and begins the resync operation.
Jack Resync Interval - This adjustment sets the number of days between automatic jack
—
O30 1-3 resync operations.
See also: FJR and JRT
O31 floor 1–nf Jack Resync Landing - This adjustment sets the return landing for jack resync return.
Jack Resync Door - This adjustment sets the preferred door to open at the jack
resync return landing during jack resync operation.
0 = Front
1 = Rear
Lobby Recall Return Landing - This adjustment sets the landing that lobby recall will return
O33 floor 1–nf
to during lobby recall operation.


Lobby Recall Door - This adjustment sets the preferred door to open at the lobby recall
landing during lobby recall operation.
0 = Front
1 = Rear
Fan-Light Shutdown Timer - This adjustment sets the time that the fan and light turn off
O35 sec. 0–3600
(after all demand for service from the car has ended).
Capture Return Landing.
Value:
O36 floor 1–nf
0 = Stop car at the first available landing.
1 - nf = Specify which landing is the capture return landing.
Capture Door To Open.
Values:
O37 F/R 0–2 0 = Front
1 = Rear
2 = Both
Capture Door Operation.
Values:
O38 — 0–1
0 = The doors remain closed until opened with the CAPTD input.
1 = The doors open and stay open until deactivated.
Capture Override Independent Service.
Values:
O39 — 0–1
0 = No
1 = Yes
Capture Override Car Stop Switch.
Values:
O40 — 0–1
0 = No
1 = Yes
Attendant Service Call Latch - This adjustment allows the attendant service to latch car
calls while the doors are open.
0 = Disable the latch
1 = Enable the latch
This adjustment enables or disables the reverse car call cancel.
Values:
O42 — 0–1
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
This adjustment enables or disables CE fixtures and VISTA monitoring.
0-65535 Values:
O43 —
0 = Off
9 = Enable CE fixture on the car CAN channel 2.
Jack Resync Interval - This adjustment sets the number of motor starts necessary before
O44 # of starts 100-65535 the launch of automatic jack resync operations.
See also: FJR, JRT, and O30
O45 — 0–1 Enable Sabbath Operation.
Sabbath Operation Main Floor Opening - When the Sabbath Operation is initiated, this
adjustment sets the door opening at the recall floor (that will open after homing), to begin
dispatching to selected floors.
O55 F/R 0–1
Values:
0 = Front doors
1 = Rear doors


Sabbath Operation Door Close Buzzer - When on Sabbath Operation (if enable) the buzzer
will sound for 3 seconds prior to the doors closing after stopping at a Sabbath-served floor.
0 = Buzzer disabled
1 = Buzzer enabled
Slowdown Type.
Values:
P10 — 1–3 1 = Hoistway Up and Down slowdown switches
2 = Not used
3 = Encoder or tape-derived continuous position count slowdown
Position Type.
Values:
P11 — 0–8
0 = No Position Count Measuring System
5 = ICON32 (CAN Selector)
Rear Leveling Vane [Magnet] Zone Enable.
DIAGNOSTICS
Values:
P12 — 0–1
0 = False (Front Leveling Zone)
1 = True (both Front and Rear Leveling Zones)
Long Terminal Slowdowns.
Values:
P15 — 0–1
0 = Slowdown vane active only at slowdown points.
1 = Slowdown vane active at terminal landing floor levels.
Up Slowdown Distance (for tape selectors) - This adjustment sets the distance before the
target floor where the Up slowdown begins. To cause an earlier slowdown, increase the
P17 dpp 0–65535 P17 adjustment.
Notes:
• There are 512 dpp counts per foot.
Down Slowdown Distance (for tape selectors) - This adjustment sets the distance before
the target floor where the Down slowdown begins. To cause an earlier slowdown, increase
P18 dpp 0–65535 the P18 adjustment.
Notes:
Encoder Level Distance - This adjustment sets the distance away from the floor level count
P19 dpp 0–512 that will cause the car to relevel. Encoder leveling also requires adjustment P21 = 1.
Note: There are 512 dpp counts per foot.
Encoder Count Tolerance - The encoder position count must be within the encoder count
tolerance, when level at that floor.
• The encoder recalibration at LVU and LVD vanes must not change the encoder count by
P20 dpp 0–1024 more than the encoder count tolerance.
• Failure of either the position count or the recalibration will result in the loss of encoder
position with recovery of a floor hunt or terminal hunt.
Encoder Leveling.
Values:
P21 — 0–1
0 = No encoder leveling
1 = Encoder leveling enabled
Encoder Leveling Hysterisis - This adjustment prevents dithering on the re-level activation
point.
• When the car is level, then the value of P22 is added to P19 encoded level distance to
increase the level distance by P22.
P22 dpp 0–16
• When the car crosses the re-level distance then the hysterisis is removed.
• The effect is to create a dead zone where the car will not re-level when sitting on the re-
level point.
See also: P19, P21


Inconspicuous Riser Monitor Operation - If enabled, the activation of an inconspicuous
riser hall call will automatically activate the Inconspicuous Riser Operation.
R10 — 0–1 Values:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Inconspicuous Riser Deactivates on Emergency Power - If enabled, the activation of emer-
gency power will automatically deactivate the Inconspicuous Riser Operation.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Inconspicuous Riser Deactivation Time - This adjustment sets the minimum amount of
time that the Inconspicuous Riser Operation will remain active (once it has been activated).
R26 sec. 1–255
Note: Typical adjustment value – The time required to enter the car and register a destina-
tion car call after response to an Inconspicuous Riser hall call.
Inconspicuous Riser Deactivates Tenant Security - If enabled, the activation of the Incon-
spicuous Riser Operation will deactivate Tenant Security.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Security Type – This adjustment (for car functions only) is a type of required Tenant Secu-
rity. The Type # must be coordinated with the group security type and the group functions.
See S43.
Values:
0 = (TYPE 0) No security required, or the group invokes security and car homes,
and shuts down if the return landing (S11) is set
1 = (TYPE 1) Car Call Lockouts in the group
2 = (TYPE 2) Car Call Lockouts in group with override inputs in the car
S10 — 0–10
3 = (TYPE 3-1) Car Call Lockouts in group with override inputs in the car
4 = (TYPE 3-2) Security override output only
5 = (TYPE 4) Group Hall Card readers is an invalid selection for the car
6 = (TYPE 5) Security Override output only
7 = (TYPE 6) Car Call Lockouts at the car level
8 = (TYPE 7) Car Call Lockouts at the car level (no group function)
9 = (TYPE 8) Contract configured security
10 = (TYPE 9) Contract configured security
Security Return Landing - The car will home to this floor when placed on Security Opera-
S11 floor 1–nf
tion. The car call for this floor will not be locked out.
Door to Open Upon Return - This adjustment sets which door (front or rear) opens when
car is homed to the Security Return Landing (see S11).
S12 F/R 0–1 Values:
0 = Front Door
1 = Rear Door
Allow DOB on Security - This adjustment determines whether or not the Door Open Button
(DOB) is allowed to open the doors at a secured opening.
Note: This adjustment affects both front and rear doors.
S13 — 0–1
Values:
0 = DOB is not allowed at secured floor.
1 = DOB is allowed at secured floor.
One Car Call at a Time on Security - This adjustment allows registration of one car call at a
time while on security. All subsequent car call registrations will be inhibited.
S14 — 0–1 Values:
0 = Car calls are not limited to one at a time.
1 = Car calls are limited to one at a time.


Security Homing Delay - When Security Homing is enabled, this adjustment sets the delay
S15 sec. 0–255
that must expire before the car is forced to the security return landing.
Security Door Time - After security has homed the car, this adjustment sets the amount of
S16 0.1 sec. 0–255
time the doors will stand open when the car has arrived at the security return landing.
Security Exit Not Required - This adjustment allows all landings in a building to be secured,
including the security return landing.
0 = Security return landing can not be secured.
1 = Security return landing can be secured.
Security Homing Enabled Between Calls - This adjustment returns the car to the security
return landing when it has no calls.
0 = Security homing is not enabled.
1 = Security homing is enabled.
Car Call Lockout Override Registers Car Call - This adjustment activates a lockout override
DIAGNOSTICS
input to register the associated car call.
Values:
0 = Lockout Override activation does not register the corresponding car call.
S39 — 0–3 1 = Lockout Override activation registers the corresponding car call.
2 = While on Program A security, the Lockout Override activation registers the corre-
sponding car call.
3 = While on Program B security, Lockout Override activation registers the correspond-
ing car call.
S40 floor 0–nf Neonatal Landing A.
S41 floor 0–nf Neonatal Landing B.
S42 floor 1–nfloors Group Security Floor.
Group Security Type - This adjustment (for group functions only) is a type of required
Tenant Security.
See also: S10 (CAR security type).
Values:
0 = (TYPE 0) No security required, or the group invokes security and the car homes and
shuts down if the return landing (S11) is set.
1 = (TYPE 1) Car call lockouts in the group.
2 = (TYPE 2) Car call lockouts in the group with override inputs in the car.
S43 — 0–11 3 = (TYPE 3-1) Car call lockouts in the group with override inputs in the car.
4 = (TYPE 3-2) Security override output only.
5 = (TYPE 4) Group hall card readers is an invalid selection for the car.
6 = (TYPE 5) Security override output only.
7 = (TYPE 6) Car call lockouts at the car level.
8 = (TYPE 7) Car call lockouts at the car level (no group function).
9 = (TYPE 8) Contract configured security.
10 = (TYPE 9) Contract configured security.
11 = Ethernet security.
S50 floor 0–nf Neonatal Landing C.
S51 floor 0–nf Neonatal Landing D.
Emergency Dispatch to Secured Floors.
S52 — — 0 = Disable
1 = Enable
V10 sec. 0–900 VIP Call Door Standing Time.
VIP Call Priority - Establish priorities for car response to VIP calls.
Values:
V11-V25 — 0–16 0 = Disable service
V11 = Highest priority call
V25 = Lowest priority call


VIP Calls Assigned by.
Values:
V26 — 0–2 0 = Best Car
1 = Priority
2 = Preferred (Security or Kiosk)
Audible Car Call Enable - This adjustment sets an audible signal to alert a handicapped
passenger that a car call has been accepted by the elevator.
X10 — 0–1 Values:
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Arrow Type - This adjustment sets the direction and preference arrows.
Direction arrows indicate direction of actual car movement.
Preference arrows indicate direction in which car has a preference to run.
0 = Direction arrows
1 = Preference arrows
2 = Preference and direction arrows
Car Lantern at Door Reversal Limit - This adjustment enables car lantern operation when
the door reaches the reversal limit switch.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Car Lantern at Lobby - This adjustment enables car lantern operation when the car
reaches the lobby.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
X14 0.1 sec. 1–48 Flasher Rate - This adjustment sets the flashing rate for the flashing jewels.
Front Lantern Type - This adjustment sets the type of lanterns used for front openings.
Values:
0 = No Lanterns
X15 — 0–4 1 = Car Lanterns only
2 = Hall Lanterns only
3 = Both Car and Hall Lanterns
4 = Arrival Lanterns
X16 0.1 sec. 0–40 Lantern Delay at Lobby - This adjustment sets the delay time of lantern activation at lobby.
Lantern Fire Position - This adjustment sets when the lanterns activate during fire service.
Values:
X17 — 0–2 0 = At slow-down
1 = At leveling zone
2 = At floor level
Lantern Off Time - This adjustment sets the duty of the off time during on/off cycle of lan-
X18 0.1 sec. 0–20
terns and gongs operation.
Lantern On Time - This adjustment sets the duty of the on time during on/off cycle of lan-
X19 0.1 sec. 0–20
terns and gongs operation.
PI Timeout Time - This adjustment sets the time delay before the position indicators (PI)
X20 minutes 0–10 will turn off (if allowed by other options that may be active).
Note: If this value is not set, PI Timeout will not be allowed.


Rear Lantern Type - This adjustment sets the type of lanterns used for rear openings.
Values:
0 = No Lanterns
X21 — 0–4 1 = Car Lanterns only
2 = Hall Lanterns only
3 = Both Car and Hall Lanterns
4 = Arrival Lanterns
Floor Passing Tone to Buzzer - This adjustment sets whether or not the buzzer in the car
station will be used for the floor passing tone.
Values:
X22 — 0–2
0 = Buzzer in car station will not be used for floor passing tone.
1 = Buzzer in car station will be used for floor passing tone (only if FPT does not exist).
2 = Buzzer in car station will be used for floor passing tone.
Number of Display Characters - This adjustment sets the number of display characters
available in the Digital PI. Note: For the Hall PI, see X28.
DIAGNOSTICS
3 = 3-character display
4 = 4-character display
GAL Tone Timer Adjustment - This adjustment sets the actual length of time that floor
X24 0.1 sec. 1–20
passing tone signal will be active (to indicate the car is passing or arriving at a new floor).
X25 1/16 sec. 1–48 Flashing Timer - This adjustment sets the flashing rate of flashing jewels.
Hall CAN Channel PI Number of Display Characters.
Note: For the Car PI, see X23.
X28 — 3–4
Set to 3 = 3 character display
Set to 4 = 4 character display
Independent Service Call Latch - This adjustment allows Independent Service to latch car
calls while the doors are open; effected by O78 Adjustment.
Values:
Z12 — 0-2
0 = Disable independent service call latch.
1 = Enable independent service call latch, and flush all car calls on arrival.
2 = Enable independent service call latch, and leave further car calls latched on arrival.
Forcing Door Close - This adjustment is used for MAC DC door operators. DC will not be
active during a run. Possibly used for freight, if required.
Values:
Z15 — 0-3 0 = No MAC
1 = Front MAC Only
2 = Rear MAC Only
3 = Both Front and Rear MAC
Z26 — 0-255 —
Car Fan Turn Off Timer - This adjustment sets the car idle time required before the cab fan
Z33 sec. 0-3600
turns off.
Car Light Turn Off Timer - This adjustment sets the car idle time required before the cab
Z34 sec. 0-3600
lights turn off.
Hoistway Access Bottom Floor Door Selection.
Values:
0 = Front
Z38 — 0-1
1 = Rear
See also: O11, O21, O22, and Z39.
Hoistway Access Top Floor Door Selection.
Values:
0 = Front
Z39 — 0-1
1 = Rear
See also: O11, O21, O22, and Z38.


VIP Voice Message ID - This adjustment sets which message to activate with VIP Call.
0 = No message
Z42 — 0,9,13
9 = Code Blue message
13 = Custom message (requires custom chip).
Enable VIP Operation at Group Level.
Values:
Z43 — 0-1
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Run Stall Time (Required by California) - This adjustment sets a timer that quickly detects a
stalled UP Run.
Z44 0.1 sec. 0-100 This timer is intended to prevent faults such as:
• A motor burn-out (in the event of a motor phase reversal).
• Running Up after rupture valve has activated (to prevent emptying tank).

Diagnostics Section Commands
Commands
Name Definition
CJR This command clears the jack resync statistics.
DCN Display CN stats and channel/port assignments where:
Name = User friendly name of the node stored in the CPU
On = State of CAN communication (Online=1, Offline=0)
RxTot = Total number of frames received
ID = CN address per CN jumpers JP(7,6,5,4)
Ch = Physical channel (2=COP, 3=Hall)
DCN SP = Number of shared ports between cars (Remote I/O Box)
TP = Number of total ports used by this CN
channel: Where 2=>Car, 3=>Hall
numPorts: 0-15 defines the number of ports used by this CN
DIAGNOSTICS
port0 port1...port15: For each physical CN port used by this CN, list the associated port in I/O layout matching
the IMS I/O screen column.
DSL Display Stabilized Leveling Distance.
Elevator Designator Display - This command displays the ASCII designator for this car. ELD shows the designa-
ELD
tor displayed by Owner's IMS Group Dispatch Window. See also PIG.
FCP Floor Count Position Display Command - This command displays the encoder position count for each floor.
FJR Force Jack Resync - This command signals an immediate request for a jack resync operation.
GET Parameters - This command retrieves the saved parameters from the EEPROM and moves them into RAM.
• The CPU only works with parameter values that are stored in its RAM memory.
GET • To display a parameter that caused an out of range error, type GET and press Enter.
• To eliminate a parameter error, enter a value in the appropriate range, save with the WRT Command, and
recall with the GET Command.
GPN Display Group Node - This command displays which node the car is communicating to (for group functions).
IOView IOView - This command displays the I/O names by bit location.
Inconspicuous Riser Lockouts - This command displays front landings that are locked out by the Inconspicuous
IRL
Riser Operation.
Inconspicuous Riser Lockouts Rear - This command displays rear landings that are locked out by the Inconspic-
IRLR
uous Riser Operation.
JRT Jack Resync Time - This command sets the time of day that a jack resync will occur.
OSDM Operating System Diagnostics - This command displays information to be sent to the log file.
PIG Group Floor Display - This command changes the position indicator display for the group.
Pressure Relief Test - This command allows the car to run to the stop ring to perform a Pressure Relief Test.
1. Place the car at the top landing.
2. Put the car on Inspection Operation.
PRT
3. Run the car onto the Top Directional Limit (DL).
4. Issue the PRT Command.
5. Run the car UP on Inspection Operation past the DL.
Scan Call Assignment Table - This command reviews the scan assignment table of all floors that effect group
SCA
(hall call) service.
Set Car Call - This command sets the nth landing car call. For rear calls, see SRC.
SCC
See also: SCCB, SCCT, SDC, SRC, SRD, SRU, and SUC.
Set Close Floor - This command allows viewing and editing of the close floor table. Note: This automatically
SCF
sets itself up during a hoistway scan. Close floor is 4–16 inches of travel between floors.
Set Car Call Bottom - This command sets the bottom landing car call. To set, type SCCB and press Enter.
• If the bottom landing has a front opening, the front car call will be set.
SCCB
• If the bottom landing does not have a front opening, the rear car call will be set.
See also: SCC, SCCT, SDC, SRC, SRD, SRU, SUC

Commands Diagnostics Section
Name (cont.) Definition (cont.)

Set Car Call Top - This command sets the top landing car call. To set, type SCCT and press Enter.
• If the top landing has a front opening, the front car call will be set.
SCCT
• If the top landing does not have a front opening, the rear car call will be set.
See also: SCC, SCCB, SDC, SRC, SRD, SRU, SUC
Set Down Call - This command simulates a group down hall call assignment to this car at nth landing; Only this
SDC car will respond to this call.
See also: SCC, SCCB, SCCT, SRC, SRD, SRU, SUC
Secure Floor Lockout - This command locks out access to a floor from its car call button (Fire Service will over-
ride).
SFL
Sets manual lockout or lockout override for front car call(s). A lockout will lock out a car call until an override is
activated, and a lockout override will unlock a floor until it is removed.
Secure Floor Lockout Rear - This command locks out access to a floor from its car call button (Fire Service will
override).
SFLR
Sets manual lockout or lockout override for rear car call(s). A lockout will lock out a car call until an override is
activated, and a lockout override will unlock a floor until it is removed.
Secure Floor Lock Command for Hall Calls - This command locks out access to a hall button on all cars in a
SHL
group.
SPC Safety Processor Configure - This command requires JP2 on the IOF Card to be across pins 1-2.
SRC Set Rear Car Call - This command registers a rear car call from the UIT.
Set Rear Down Call - This command sets the nth landing rear down car call.
SRD
See also: SCC, SCCB, SCCT, SDC, SRD, SRU, SUC.
Set Rear Up Call - This command sets the nth landing rear up car call.
SRU
See also: SCC, SCCB, SCCT, SDC, SRD, SRU, SUC.
Special Security Initialization - This command restores the Job EPROM defaults.
SSI
Note: Only for jobs with special security.
Selector Setup Command - This command disregards the door limit and door zone inputs.
STU Verify that the car door is closed before running the car from this
command; equipment damage could result.
Setup Automatic Command - This command performs an automatic hoistway learn; the car must be on Door
STUA
Disconnect, and then the car will lower to the bottom DL and scan the hoistway.
Set Up Call - This command simulates a Group Up Hall Call assignment to this car at nth landing.
SUC Note: Only this car will respond to this call.
See also: SCC, SDC, SRD, SRU, SUC.
TECC Teach CAN Configuration - This command configures all online nodes.
TECCR This command erases the TECC configuration information on all CAN nodes communicating on Channels 2 & 3.
TMP This command displays the current ambient controller temperature.
UDLS This command saves all the controller files to the USB stick drive folder “/tke/backup/xxnnnn.”
UDLR This command copies files from the “/tke/backup/xxnnnn” folder to the “/tke/update” folder.
UFWCNC This command displays the CAN Node - Car Channel (CH:2).
UFWCNH This command displays the CAN Node - Hall Channel (CH:3).
UFWSLF This command updates the SEL from a USB flash drive.
UFWSPF This command updates the Safety Processor software from a USB flash drive.
Version - This command displays the version/revision of Car Generic Software, Safety Processor, NTSD
VER
Processor, OS, and FPGAs, as well as the job number of the controller for which the software was designed.
WJR This command displays Jack resync activity.
Write Parameters - This command saves working values in RAM memory to the EEPROM (which protects the
WRT working values in the event the controller's power is lost). Note: On power-up, or if terminal is disconnected, the
working values are read from EEPROM into RAM memory.
WRTG This command writes group adjustments to all controllers connected to the group.

Diagnostics Section Inputs and Outputs
Inputs and Outputs

Designator Name
ABP Security - A/B Program Switch
ABPJ Security - A/B Program Jewel
AFI At Floor Indicator
ALBA Alarm Button Activated
ALBI Alarm Button Activated Indicator
ALBL Alarm Bell (Fire Bell)
ARGF Active Roller Guide Fault
ARL1-ARL64 Arrival Lantern - Per Floor
ARLR1-ARLR64 Arrival Lantern Rear - Per Floor
DIAGNOSTICS
ARNI Automatic Run Indicator
ATB Attendant Bypass Pushbutton
ATBI Attendant Bypass Indicator
ATDB Attendant Down Pushbutton
ATDC Attendant Door Close Speed
ATDI Attendant Down Indicator
ATT Attendant Service
ATTI Attendant Service Indicator
ATUB Attendant Up Pushbutton
ATUI Attendant Up Indicator
AUTOI Automatic Operation Indicator
AUTO2I Automatic and/or Security Operation Indicator
BUZ Buzzer - Floor Passing, Fire, and Nudging
BYSG Bypass Safety Gear Switch
C1-C64 Car Call - Combination I/O
CAPT Capture Operation
CAPTD Capture Operation Door Open
CAPTI Capture Operation Indicator
CAPTR Capture Operation Reset
CB Hoistway Door Closed Bottom
CB1-CB64 Code Blue Call - Combination I/O
CBAI Code Blue Active Indicator (Per Car)
CBELL Freight Door Call Bell
CBI1-CBI64 Code Blue Call - Input
CBJG Code Blue Indicator (Any Car)
CBO1-CBO64 Code Blue Call - Output
CBR1-CBR64 Code Blue Call - Rear - Combination I/O
CBRI1-CBRI64 Code Blue Call - Rear - Input
CBRO1-CBRO64 Code Blue Call - Rear - Output
CCEM Car Call Ind Enable Main
CCER Car Call Ind Enable Remote
CCIE Car Call Indicator Enable
CCM Control Cutout Main Station
CCPO Car Call Panel Open
CCR Control Cutout Remote Station

Inputs and Outputs Diagnostics Section
Designator (cont.) Name

CDBI Car Door Bypass Indicator
CDBM Car Door Bypass Monitor
CDBM2 Car Door Bypass - Monitor #2
CDCF Car Door Contact Front
CDCR Car Door Contact Rear
CF Hoistway Door Closed Front
CHKDS Check Doors and Stop Inputs
CI1-CI64 Car Call - Input
CL1-CL64 Car Call Lockout
CLD Car Lantern - Down
CLDR Car Lantern - Down Rear
CLFS Car Light/Fan Shutdown
CLI1-CLI64 Car Call Lockout Indicator
CLIR1-CLIR64 Car Call Lockout Indicator - Rear
CLO1-CLO64 Car Call Lockout Override
CLOR1-CLOR64 Car Call Lockout Override - Rear
CLR1-CLR64 Car Call Lockout - Rear
CLU Car Lantern - Up
CLUR Car Lantern - Up Rear
CO1-CO64 Car Call - Output
CR Hoistway Door Closed Rear
CR1-CR64 Car Call - Rear - Combination I/O
CRI1-CRI64 Car Call - Rear - Input
CRO1-CRO64 Car Call - Rear - Output
CST Car Stop Switch Monitor
CSTI Car Stop Switch Indicator
CT Hoistway Door Closed Top
D2-D64 Hall Call - Down - Combination I/O
DAD Direction Arrow - Down
DAU Direction Arrow - Up
DBEH Door Button Enable - Hall - Front
DBEHR Door Button Enable - Hall - Rear
DC Door Close
DCA Door Close Assist
DCAD Door Close Auto Disable - Front
DCADR Door Close Auto Disable - Rear
DCAE Door Close Auto Enable - Front
DCAER Door Close Auto Enable - Rear
DCAR Door Close Assist - Rear
DCB Door Close Button - Front
DCBR Door Close Button - Rear
DCL Door Close Limit
DCL6 Door Close Limit 6"
DCL6R Door Close Limit 6" - Rear
DCLR Door Close Limit - Rear
DCN Door Close Nudging
DCNR Door Close Nudging - Rear
DCR Door Close - Rear


DD Door Disconnect
DHB Door Hold Button
DHBR Door Hold Button - Rear
DHBUZ Door Hold Buzzer - Front
DHBUZR Door Hold Buzzer - Rear
DHI Door Hold Indicator
DHIR Door Hold Indicator - Rear
DHS Door Hold Switch
DHSR Door Hold Switch - Rear
DI2-DI64 Hall Call - Down - Input
DISBR Distress Buzzer Reset
DISBZ Distress Buzzer
DISI Distress Indicator
DIAGNOSTICS
DISVIP Input - If active, the car will not be considered for VIP Operation
DJ1-DJ64 Down Hall Call Lockout Jewel Outputs
DL2-DL64 Hall Call - Down - Lockout
DLB Direction Limit - Bottom
DLO2-DLO64 Hall Call - Down - Lockout Override
DLOR2-DLOR64 Hall Call - Down - Rear - Lockout Override
DLR2-DLR64 Hall Call - Down - Rear - Lockout
DLT Direction Limit Top
DO Door Open
DO1 Door Open
DO1R Door Open Rear
DO2-DO64 Hall Call - Down - Output
DOB Door Open Button - Front
DOBR Door Open Button - Rear
DOH Door Open High Speed
DOHR Door Open High Speed - Rear
DOI Door Open Indicator
DOIR Door Open Indicator - Rear
DOL Door Open Limit
DOLR Door Open Limit - Rear
DOPE Door Operation Enable - Front
DOPER Door Operation Enable - Rear
DOR Door Open - Rear
DORL Door Open Reversal Limit
DORLR Door Open Reversal Limit - Rear
DPK Down Peak Operation
DPKJ Down Peak Jewel
DR2-DR64 Hall Call - Down - Rear - Combination I/O
DRI2-DRI64 Hall Call - Down - Rear - Input
DRJ1-DRJ64 Down Rear Hall Call Lockout Jewel Outputs
DRO2-DRO64 Hall Call - Down - Rear - Output
DSPJ Dispatch Failure Jewel
DSPJ1-DSPJ16 Car # Dispatch Failure Jewel
DWDI Door Watchdog Indicator
DWDRI Door Watchdog Rear Indicator


DZ1 Door Zone #1
EE Electric Eye
EER Electric Eye - Rear
EES Electric Eye Shutoff Switch
EESR Electric Eye Shutoff Switch - Rear
EL1-EL16 Car # Emergency Power Lowering Jewel
EMDIS Emergency Dispatch Operation (Sabbath Operation)
EPA Emergency Power - Automatic
EPAI Emergency Power - Acknowledge Indicator
EPALI Emergency Power - At Designated Landing Indicator
EPCS1-16 Emergency Power - Manual Car Select - Car #n
EPCSI Emergency Power - Car Selected Indicator
EPEPI Emergency Power - Emergency Power Indicator
EPJ Emergency Power - Emergency Power Indicator
EPLDI Emergency Power - Emergency Power Car At Landing Indicator
EPLI Emergency Power Lowering Indicator
EPNP Emergency Power - Normal Power
EPNPI Emergency Power Normal Power Indicator
EPW Emergency Power Warning
ES1-ES16 Car # Emergency Power Selection Jewel
EZNI Express Zone Indicator
F1-F64 Freight SAPB Call - Combination I/O
FALI Failure Indicator
FALNI Not Failed Indicator
FDL1-FDL9 Freight Door Landing Signal
FDR Freight Door Reset - Front
FHS Flashing Hall Signs
FI1-FI64 Freight SAPB Call - Input
FL1-FL64 Hall Call - Floor Lockout
FLO1-FLO64 Hall Call - Floor Lockout Override
FLOR1-FLOR64 Hall Call - Rear - Floor Lockout Override
FLR1-FLR64 Hall Call - Rear - Floor Lockout
FO1-FO64 Freight SAPB Call - Output
FPT Floor Passing Tone
FPTON Floor Passing Tone On
FR1-FR64 Freight SAPB Call - Rear - Combination I/O
FRC Freight Retiring Cam - Front
FRI1-FRI64 Freight SAPB Call - Rear - Input
FRO1-FRO64 Freight SAPB Call - Rear - Output
FRODO Freight Door Open - Front
FRODOR Freight Door Open - Rear
FS1A Fire Service Phase 1 Active (Front)
FS1AI Fire Service - Phase 1 Indicator
FS1FI Fire Service Phase 1 Switch Off Indicator
FS1I Fire Service - Phase 1 Indicator
FS1R Fire Service Phase 1 Recall Active (Front)
FS1RR Fire Service Phase 1 Recall Active (Rear)
FS2A Fire Service Phase 2 Active (Front)


FS2F Fire Service Phase 2 Switch Off (Front)
FS2H Fire Service Phase 2 Switch Hold (Front)
FS2HR Fire Service Phase 2 Switch Hold (Rear)
FS2HX Fire Service Phase 2 Switch Hold (Front) (Rev Logic)
FS2HXR Fire Service Phase 2 Switch Hold (Rear) (Rev Logic)
FS2I Fire Service - Phase 2 Indicator
FSA Fire Service Active (Front)
FSAFI Fire Service - Alternate Floor Indicator
FSAL Fire Service at Designated Landing (Front)
FSBZ Fire Service Buzzer
FSC1 Fire Service - Car - On
FSC2 Fire Service - Car - Off
FSCC Fire Service - Call Cancel
DIAGNOSTICS
FSDFI Fire Service - Door Failed Indicator
FSDO Fire Service - Fireman's Door Open
FSE Fire Service Sensor - Equipment
FSH1 Fire Service - Hall - Main - On
FSH1A Fire Service - Hall - Main - On
FSH2 Fire Service - Hall - Main - Off
FSH2A Fire Service - Hall - Main - Off
FSH3 Fire Service - Hall - Aux - On
FSH3A Fire Service - Hall - Aux - On
FSH4 Fire Service - Hall - Aux - Off
FSH4A Fire Service - Hall - Aux - Off
FSH5 Fire Service - Hall - Main - Reset (Bypass)
FSH5A Fire Service - Hall - Main - Reset (Bypass)
FSHX Fire Service Phase 2 Switch Hold (Front)
FSHXR Fire Service Phase 2 Switch Hold (Rear)
FSI Fire Service Indicator (Phase 1 or 2)
FSM Fire Service Sensor - Main
FSMFI Fire Service - Main Floor Indicator
FSPO Fire Service Panel Open
FSR Fire Service Phase 1 Recall Active
FSRI Fire Service Return Indicator
FSRR Fire Service Rear Door Closing PH1/PH2
FSSR Fire Service Sensor Reset
FST Fire Service Sensor - High Temperature
FSX Fire Service Sensor - Auxiliary
GCL1-GCL64 Car Call Lockout - Group Wide
GCLR1-GCLR64 Car Call Lockout - Rear - Group Wide
HABD Inspection - Hoistway Access - Bottom - Down
HABDM Inspection - Hoistway Access - Bottom - Down - Monitor
HABU Inspection - Hoistway Access - Bottom - Up
HABUM Inspection - Hoistway Access - Bottom - Up - Monitor
HATD Inspection - Hoistway Access - Top - Down
HATDM Inspection - Hoistway Access - Top - Down - Monitor
HATU Inspection - Hoistway Access - Top - Up
HATUM Inspection - Hoistway Access - Top - Up - Monitor


HCIE Hall Call Indicator Enable
HCP Hall Call Power Monitor
HDBI Hoistway Door Bypass Indicator
HDBM Hoistway Door Bypass - Monitor
HDBM2 Hoistway Door Bypass - Monitor #2
HDFI Hoistway Door Interlock Front Closed Indicator - Output
HDRI Hoistway Door Interlock Rear Closed Indicator - Output
HDIFI Hoistway Door Interlock Failure Indicator
HDIFRI Hoistway Door Interlock Failure Rear Indicator
HES Hospital Emergency Service
HESI Hospital Emergency Service Active Indicator
HL1-HL64 Hall Lantern - Landing Signal
HLD2-HLD64 Hall Lantern - Down - Front - Per Landing
HLDR2-HLDR64 Hall Lantern - Down - Rear - Per Landing
HLU1-HLU63 Hall Lantern - Up - Front - Per Landing
HLUR1-HLUR63 Hall Lantern - Up - Rear - Per Landing
HM1 Homing #1 - Lobby Park
HM1I Homing #1 Indicator
HM1NI Homing #1 Not Active Indicator
HM2 Homing #2
HM3 Homing #3
HMCLI Homing - Car At Lobby Indicator
HML Homing - Lobby Recall
HMLI Homing - Lobby Recall Operation Active Indicator
HMLNI Homing - Lobby Recall Operation Not Active Indicator
HPID Hall PI Disable
IB Hoistway Door Interlock Bottom
ID2-ID64 Inconspicuous Riser Call - Down - Combination I/O
IDI2-IDI64 Inconspicuous Riser Call - Down - Input
IDO2-IDO64 Inconspicuous Riser Call - Down - Output
IDR2-IDR64 Inconspicuous Riser Call - Down - Rear - Combination I/O
IDRI2-IDRI64 Inconspicuous Riser Call - Down - Rear - Input
IDRO2-IDRO64 Inconspicuous Riser Call - Down - Rear - Output
IF Hoistway Door Interlock Front
INCL Inspection - Pit
INCLM Inspection - Pit - Monitor
INCN Inspection - Controller
INCND Inspection - Controller - Down
INCNM Inspection - Controller - Monitor
INCNU Inspection - Controller - Up
INCTD Inspection - Car Top - Down
INCTE Inspection - Car Top - Enable Monitor
INCTM Inspection - Car Top - Monitor
INCTU Inspection - Car Top - Up
INHAM Inspection - Hoistway Access Monitor
INRB Inspection Run Bug


INRBD Inspection Run Bug Down
INRBU Inspection Run Bug Up
IR Hoistway Door Interlock Rear
IRO Inconspicuous Riser Operation
IROI Inconspicuous Riser Operation Indicator
IRS Inconspicuous Riser Activation Switch (Not Implemented)
ISC Independent Service - Car
ISCI Independent Service - Car - Indicator
ISH Independent Service - Hall
ISHI Independent Service - Hall - Indicator
IT Hoistway Door Interlocks Top - Series connection of all non-hoistway access front door interlocks.
IU1-IU63 Inconspicuous Riser Call - Up - Combination I/O
IUI1-IUI63 Inconspicuous Riser Call - Up - Input
DIAGNOSTICS
IUL In Use Light
IUO1-IUO63 Inconspicuous Riser Call - Up - Output
IUR1-IUR63 Inconspicuous Riser Call - Up - Rear - Combination I/O
IURI1-IURI63 Inconspicuous Riser Call - Up - Rear - Input
IURO1-IURO63 Inconspicuous Riser Call - Up - Rear - Output
LBYST Lobby Stop If Passing Lobby Stop At Lobby
LVD Level Down
LVU Level Up
LWA Loadweigher - Anti-nuisance
LWB Loadweigher - Bypass
LWBI Loadweigher - Bypass - Indicator
LWD Loadweigher - Dispatch
LWO Loadweigher - Overload
LWOI Loadweigher - Overload - Indicator
MCC1 Motor Contactor Control #1
MCD Motor Contactors De-energized
MCF Motor Contactor Fault
MCM Motor Contactor Output Monitor
MEC Medical Emergency - Car
MEH Medical Emergency - Hall
MEHI Medical Emergency - Hall Indicator
MEI Medical Emergency - Indicator
MTSTRT Motor is Starting - Indicator - Output
MUTS Motor Up To Speed Input from Electronic Motor Starter (EMS), used by controller for MCE & MCD states.
NATLA Neonatal Hold at Landing A
NATLB Neonatal Hold at Landing B
NATLC Neonatal Hold at Landing C
NATLD Neonatal Hold at Landing D
NATLH Neonatal Hold at Any Landing
NATLI Neonatal Operation Indicator
NATX Neonatal Operation Inputs; x = Floor Number (Baby Monitor)
OFLNI Off Line Indicator
OOSI Out of Service Indicator
PI1-PI64 Position Indicator - Light Up - Car or Controller For Car and Hoistway
PIA1-PIA64 Position Indicator.- Light Up - Alternate Landing Hoistway


PID1-PID64 Position Indicator - Digital Disc - Car or Controller for Car and Hoistway
PIEx Position Indicator - Per floor cascading discrete PI. Active during Auto and Fire Service.
PIFx Position Indicator - Per floor cascading discrete PI. Active during Auto—Disabled during Fire Service.
PIH1-PIH64 Position Indicator - Main Landing Hoistway
PHLBUZ Phone Line Buzzer
PHLFLT Phone Line Fault
PHLI Phone Line Indicator
PHLRST Phone Line Reset
Remote Car Station Activation - Input - Door operation field programmable via I/O. Requires setting
RCS
D32=0. All inactive I/O will default to D32=0.
Remote Car Station Door 1 - The doors do not automatically open upon arrival at a car call. Doors open
RCSD1
fully with DOB/DOBR, and will not close until DCB/DCBR is activated.
Remote Car Station Door 2 - The doors automatically open upon arrival at a car call, and after a delay,
RCSD2
will close back (similar to door operation on normal automatic operation).
Remote Car Station Door 3 - The doors do not automatically open upon arrival at a car call. The doors
RCSD3
open fully with DOB/DOBR, but will close when DOB/DOBR is released.
Remote Car Station Door 4 - The doors do not automatically open upon arrival at car call.
• The doors will open with constant pressure on DOB/DOBR, but will close if DOB/DOBR is not main-
RCSD4 tained until the doors are opened fully.
• The doors will not close until DCB/DCBR is activated, but will reopen if DCB/DCBR is not maintained
until the doors are closed fully.
RCSI Remote Car Station Active Indicator
RUNDLY Delay Motor Start Sequence - Input
SABO Sabbath Control
SABOI Sabbath Control Indicator
SAFC Safety Circuit Control - 186
SAFECAR Safe Car Switch Monitor
SAFEI Safeties Indicator
SAFGR Safety Gear Switch Monitor
SAFHW Safe Hoistway Switches Monitor
SAFMR Safe Machine Room Switches Monitor
SAFPLD Safe PLD Monitor
SAFRB Safe Runbug Stop Switch Monitor
SAFSP Safe Safety Processor Monitor
SE Safety Edge - Front
SEIS Seismic Operation
SEISI Seismic Operation Indicator
SEISR Seismic/Counterweight Derail Operation Reset
SER Safety Edge - Rear
SOA Security Operation Activation
SOABP Car Logic Not On Program B (A/B Switch Inactive) and Group not on Program B
SOLOA Security Override Lockouts
SOO Security Operation Override
SOTL Security Operation Total Lockout
SOTLI Security Operation Total Lockout Indicator
SOTOA Security Operation Total Override Active
Smoke Sensor Landing (Input) - During the time that Code Blue is overriding PH1 Fire Service, an active
SSL1-SSL128
SSL input inhibits the car calls at the corresponding landing.
STBC Shunt Trip Breaker Control


TEMPOK Ambient Controller Temperature OK
TFE Transfer Floor Operation Enable
THLK Total Hall Call Lockout
TLOJ Total Lockout Jewel
TMPI Tamper Indicator
TMPIR Tamper Indicator Reset
U1-U15 Hall Call - Up - Combination I/O
UI1-UI63 Hall Call - Up - Input
UJ1-UJ64 Up Hall Call Lockout Jewel Outputs
UL1-UL63 Hall Call - Up - Lockout
ULO1-ULO63 Security Up Hall Call Override Inputs
ULOR1-ULOR63 Hall Call - Up - Rear - Lockout Override
ULR1-ULR63 Hall Call - Up - Rear - Lockout
DIAGNOSTICS
UO1-UO63 Hall Call - Up - Output
UPK Up Peak Operation
UPKJ Up Peak Jewel
UR1-UR63 Hall Call - Up - Rear - Combination I/O
URI1-URI63 Hall Call - Up - Rear - Input
URJ1-URJ64 Up Rear Hall Call Lockout Jewel Outputs
URO1-URO63 Hall Call - Up - Rear - Output
VIP1-VIP64 VIP Call - Combination I/O
VIPI VIP Indicator per Car
VIPJG VIP Indicator any Car
VIPR1-VIPR64 VIP Rear Call - Combination I/O
VPI1-VPI64 VIP Call - Input
VPO1-VPO64 VIP Call - Output
VPRI1-VPRI64 VIP Rear Call - Input
VPRO1-VPRO64 VIP Rear Call - Output
No Known Application Rule I/O

These I/O exist in the software but currently have no known application rules.
Designator Name
ACCI Audible Car Call Indicator
ADC Auxiliary Door Close
ADCL Auxiliary Door Close Limit (DCL)
AES Security-activate Hall Call Enable Subset
ALB Alternate Lobby Operation
ALTJ Alternate Floor Fire Service Jewel
AOV Security - Activate Car Call Overrides
ARDC Auxiliary Rear Door Close
ARDCL Auxiliary Rear Door Close Limit (DCL)
ARL Arrival Lantern
ARLR Arrival Lanterns - Rear
ATD Attendant Operation Door Speed
ATDR Attendant Operation Door Speed - Rear
BEEP Coded Car Call Entry Code Button Acknowledge


BFSHD Shutdown
BFWAR Warning
BKLT Door Open Button Back light
CCREG Car Call Registered To Allow Freight Doors To Close (Chicago Fire Service)
CFSW Car Fan Operation Switch - OCFTO
CFTO Car Fan Turn Off
CHM Chimes, See OPIL
CLSW Car Fan Operation Switch
CLTO Car Light Turn Off
DCIR Door Closing Indicator - Rear
DDO Disable Doors And Leave Car Online For Pressurized Door Operation
DFSRM Multiple Power Units
DH2-DH64 Hall Call Down (High Voltage)
DHR2-DHR64 Hall Call Down Rear (High Voltage)
DISO Distress Operation
DISOB Lockdown Operation - Secondary Input
DISOI Distress Operation Indicator
DIX Discrete Front Down Halls Call
DIXR Discrete Rear Down Halls Call
DOLI Door Open Limit Indicator
DOLRI Door Open Limit Rear Indicator
DOX Discrete Front Down Halls Call
DOXR Discrete Front Down Halls Call
DSSRM Multiple Power Units
DZM Door Zone Monitor
DZMR Door Zone Monitor - Rear
EC Extra Riser of Car Calls
ECI Extra Riser of Car Calls
ECO Extra Riser of Car Calls
ECR Extra Riser of Car Calls
ECRI Extra Riser of Car Calls
ECRO Extra Riser of Car Calls
ED2-64 Handicap Hall Call Down
EDI2-64 Handicap Hall Call Down
EDO2-64 Handicap Hall Call Down
EDR2-64 Handicap Hall Call Down
EDRI2-64 Handicap Hall Call Down
EDRO2-64 Handicap Hall Call Down
ELO1-16 Emergency Power Lowering Complete
ELOJ1-16 Emergency Power Lowering Completed Jewel
EP1-EP16 Emergency Power Manual Select Car #
EPDI Emergency Power Disable
EPDO Emergency Power Disable Jewel
EPLOJ Emergency Power Lowering Jewel
EPSE Emergency Power Auto Selection Enabled
EPSLJ Emergency Power Selection Jewel
EU1-63 Handicap Hall Call Up
EUI1-63 Handicap Hall Call Up


EUO1-63 Handicap Hall Call Up
EUR1-63 Handicap Hall Call Up
EURI1-63 Handicap Hall Call Up
EURO1-63 Handicap Hall Call Up
FALDI Failure Indicator Output (Delayed)
FDFC Freight Door Force Close (Freight Doors TAC20, TAC60)
FDFCR Freight Door Force Close Rear
FPS1I Flooded Pit Indicator
FPS2 Flooded Pit
FPS2I Flooded Pit Indicator
FS1NI Fire Service Phase 1 Switch On Indicator
FS1RI Fire Service Phase 1 Switch Reset Indicator
FS2FI Fire Service Phase 2 Switch Off Indicator
DIAGNOSTICS
FS2HI Fire Service Phase 2 Hold Indicator
FS2NI Fire Service Phase 2 Switch On Indicator
FSCDB In-car Secondary Fire Switch Door Bypass
FSCDM In-car Secondary Fire Switch Door Bypass Monitor
FSDB Fire Service Door Bypass
FSDOM Fire Service Fireman's Door Open Monitor
FSDOX Fire Phase 1 Alternate Floor Door Open
FSH6 Fire Service Phase 1 On (Tertiary Switch)
FSH7 Fire Service Phase 1 Off (Tertiary Switch)
FSH8 Fire Service Phase 1 On (Quaternary Switch)
FSH9 Fire Service Phase 1 Off (Quaternary Switch)
FSTFL Fire Service Top Final Limit
GL1M Gate And Lock Monitor #1
GL2M Gate And Lock Monitor #2
HCLA Security - Hall Call Lockout Activate
HCLD Hall / Car Lantern - Down - Front
HCLU Hall / Car Lantern - Up - Front
HCPR Hall Call Power Rear
HFJ Hall Call Power Failure Jewel
HFSJ Phase One Fire Service Jewel
HG Bit-packed Per-floor Combined Up & Down Hall Gongs
HGR Bit-packed Per-floor Combined Up & Down Hall Gongs
HLPWY Help is on the way
HOLD Next Up Hold Car
HPZ1 Hall Call Power Zone 1
HPZ1R Hall Call Power Zone 1 Rear
INDOP Independent Operation
JRSI Jack Resync Indicator
KPM Coded Car Call Entry Car Station In Keypad Mode
LWPI Load Weigher - Percent Indicator
MAINJ Main Floor Fire Service Jewel


MCFB Multiple Power Units
MGDI Sequential Starting Disable
MGDO Sequential Starting Disable
MOV Moving Indicator
MTO Material Transfer Operation
MTOI Material Transfer Operation Indicator
NOVIP Disable VIP Service with Key Switch
NXUA Next Up Active
NXUCA Next Up Car Active
NXUCD Next Up Car Dispatch
NXUCR Next Up Car Dispatch Rear
OLLD Oil Level Low Door
OFLO Emergency Power All Cars Failed Auto Selection
PDN Selector Moving Down Indication
PIC1-PIC64 Position Indicator - Discrete - Car
PUP Selector Moving Up Indication
REMOP Remote Operation
RSQ Rescue Recall Service (In Supervisor Panel)
RSQJ Rescue Recall Service (In Supervisor Panel) Indicator
RSQL Rescue Operation Switch - Left Car (In Control Panel)
RSQLJ Rescue Operation Switch - Left Car (In Control Panel) Indicator
RSQR Rescue Operation Switch - Right Car (In Control Panel)
RSQRJ Rescue Operation Switch - Right Car (In Control Panel) Indicator
RTC1-RTC16 Real Time Clock Output #1- Real Time Clock Output #16
RUNOK Run is OK
SCANDN Scan PI Down Reg CC When PI = Floor
SCANUP Scan PI Up Reg CC When PI = Floor
SEIOI Sound Buzzer if any of the Features are Activated and Seismic is not Deactivated
SEISJ Secondary Seismic Jewel
SOLAI Total Lockout Override Indicator
THLKJ Total Hall Call Lockout Jewel
UFSRM Multiple Power Units
UH1-UH64 Hall Call Down (High Voltage)
UHR1-UHR64 Hall Call Down Rear (High Voltage)
UIX Discrete Front Up Halls Calls
UIXR Discrete Rear Up Halls Calls
UOX Discrete Front Up Halls Calls
UOXR Discrete Rear Up Halls Calls
USSRM Multiple Power Units
XSEC Security Operation Override
ZONE1 Output Goes Active when Car is Below Specified Zone
ZONE2 Output Goes Active when Car is Between Upper and Lower Zones

Diagnostics Section Control System Fault Codes
Control System Fault Codes

Code Description Possible Causes/Solutions
Terminal slowdown was activated before normal slowdown; • Slowdown magnet placement, P17/P18 adjustment, or
981
This fault does not shut the car down. valve adjustment.
OS could not allocate memory - This fault is mainly used • Noise levels that affect CPU operation.
1002 during software development, but proves useful to detect • Defective CPU software allocates too much memory (only
operational issues on installed units. when installing new software version).
1003 Software scheduler overrun. —
• Car doors clipping interlocks.
Gate and locks opened during a run - A car or hoistway inter-
1004 • Defective gate contact.
lock opened while the car was running.
• Defective wiring.
• A defective DOL input.
1005 DOL was detected while HW closed.
• A defective HDIF input.
• A defective hoistway door contact.
DIAGNOSTICS
1006 The hoistway interlock failed to close.
• A blocked hoistway door.
The safety string opened during a run & caused an emer-
1007 • An open device in the safety string. Clipped interlock
gency stop.
The motor contactor is already energized (MCD/MCE) - A run
• Software activation error. MUTS signal wiring.
1008 initiation was issued, but either MCD was already inactive, or
• Defective relays/contactors for across the line starting..
MCE was already active.
• A valve contact error (MCD is open). • Valve monitor input shows active at wrong time - output wir-
• A Down run failure. ing, solenoid, IOF Card.
1009
• Either the valves or MC are not ready. • MUTS signal wiring.
• MCD is inactive, or MCE is active during a Down run. • Defective relays/contactors for across the line starting.
• Defective MCD input.
• Motor contactor error (MCD Open).
• Defective MCE input.
1010 • MCD failed to energize or MCE failed to de-energize after
• Defective MC contact. MUTS signal wiring.
run.
• Defective relays/contactors for across the line starting.
Possible Causes:
• A defective MCD/MCE input.
• The motor contactor failed to energize (MCD/MCE).
• A defective MC1/MC2 auxiliary contact.
1011 • MCD is active, or MCE is inactive after a run.
• A defective MCF input.
• Motor Contactor Fault (MCF) input is activated.
• MUTS input.
• A UTS output from EMS. EMS parameter is not correct.
1012 Job image error - Invalid number of floors. —
NV hardware failure - The software issued a command to
1013 modify non-volatile memory that was not completed, or com- —
pleted with invalid results.
Possible Causes:
• Memory error.
NV checksum error - The data in non-volatile memory was
1014 • Bad/low CPU battery.
lost.
Possible Solution:.
• Issue a GET Command followed by a WRT Command.
Software error - The software is making an invalid NV
1015 —
request.
Software error - The NV is full and cannot hold another client
1016 structure. There is no more room for data in non-volatile —
memory.
Software error - A change in run type occurred during a run.
1017 The car is not performing an emergency stop and the soft- —
ware has changed the type of run.

Control System Fault Codes Diagnostics Section
Code Description (cont.) Possible Causes/Solutions (cont.)

• CAN loading incorrect/noise on Car CAN.
Normal limit error - Both of the top and bottom normal limits
1018 • Magnet issue with selector.
(DL, NTST, NTSB) are active at the same time.
• A defective I/O.
• The normal limits and the car position do not agree.
• The selector is not lost. • CAN loading incorrect/noise on Car CAN.
1019
• The car position is not at the top or bottom floor. • Magnet issue with selector.
• The I/O DL, NTST, NTSB do not agree.
Software error - The I/O database has been corrupted, or the
1020 —
checksum for I/O has changed.
• A safety node is offline.
• Inspection indicates an invalid I/O condition. • A wiring error.
1021
• The status of an I/O indicates a combination of active and • Defective I/O: IN, INOP, INHA, INCN, INCT, INHAM.
inactive inputs that are not allowed.
1022 Run monitor - The run protect timer has expired. • Ran too long at leveling speed.
Run monitor - The wrong direction run. The software issued a
1023 command to run in one direction, but the car actually ran in —
the other direction.
Excessive number of re-levels - A fault is issued if the eleva- • A defective valve.
1024
tor re-levels more than 25 times within a 5-minute interval. • A mis-adjusted valve.
The selector shows the level outside of the door zone - The
1028 inputs indicate that the car is level at the floor-at some loca- —
tion other than within the door zone.
LU and LD are active at same time - This fault indicates that
1029 both level up and level down inputs are active at the same —
time.
Leveling sequence error - The leveling inputs were activated
1030 —
in an invalid sequence.
• Incorrect number of leveling vanes was detected.
• A bad floor position setup.
1031 Selector setup error - The selector was not properly setup.
• The selector setup is incomplete.
• Scanning the hatch too fast.
False slowdown interrupt - The slowdown interrupt was
1032 —
detected with no active slowdown input.
Selector position error - The selector position is out of step
1033 —
with either the encoder, the slowdown, or the BP position.
• The wrong type of expansion card was installed.
Expansion card error - The incorrect expansion card type was • A defective expansion card or cable.
1034
returned. • An expansion cable was installed backwards.
• An incorrect expansion card type.
Door watchdog closing failure - The DCL input did not acti- • An incorrect D21 and/or D22 adjustment. Door operator
1040
vate within the expected time interval. faulted out or failed to provide the limit.
Door watchdog opening failure - The DCL input did not acti- • An incorrect D21 and/or D22 adjustment. Door operator
1041
vate within the expected time interval. faulted out or failed to provide the limit.
Viscosity Shut Down due to over temperature – OLTO input is Reset faults and cycle inspection switch to return car to service
1042
(or was at some time) active. once OLTO state is correct.
Low Fluid Shutdown - The car did not complete a floor-to-
1043 —
floor run within the low fluid timer (Z44) interval.
Software error - Both inputs are in the required state to acti-
1044 —
vate and deactivate Fire Service Phase 1 at the same time.
Software error - Both inputs are in the required state to acti-
1045 —
vate and deactivate Fire Service Phase 2 at the same time.
Failed to add I/O to the hardware assignments list - An invalid
1046 —
I/O name was found.
1047 Calls canceled due to service interruption. —


Open door protection failure - The doors failed to open in the • A defective I/O.
1049
allotted time. • A defective door operation.
Close door protection failure - The doors failed to close in the • A defective I/O.
1050
allotted time. • A defective door operation.
Stuck door opening device error - The SE, EE, DOB, or DHB I/ • A defective I/O.
1051
O is stuck in the active state. • A defective door operation.
• A defective I/O.
1052 Stuck DCB error - A DCB I/O is stuck in the active state.
• A defective door operation.
• An invalid adjustment F16 for fire service type.
The Fire Service Phase 1 secondary switch I/O does not • An invalid adjustment F15 for the secondary fire service
1053
match the adjustment. switch type.
• The I/O provided does not match requirements.
Down run time has exceeded 5 minutes - The down run
• A defective valve adjustment.
1054 request was longer than the time allowed for a full hoistway
• A defective valve.
run in the down direction.
DIAGNOSTICS
• A defective hoistway scan.
• A defective CPU.
Floor tables of the encoder counts are not set up when
• A defective CPU battery.
attempting an auto run. When the elevator is not on inspec-
1056 • Loose battery connections.
tion operation, and the level reference in non-volatile mem-
• An improper power unit setup.
ory for any floor is invalid.
• Improper selector signals.
• Verify the Position and/or Motion adjustments.
The encoder is out of tolerance at the floor level - The car is
at floor level, and the encoder position count is different than
1057 • A defective encoder.
the floor position count by more than the value in adjustment
P20.
Selector position wrong at limit of travel - The car is at the
bottom or top of its travel limit and the selector has deter-
1058 —
mined that the closest floor is not the corresponding bottom
or top floor.
Bad encoder re-calibration - Two consecutive encoder re-cal-
ibrations were out of range. The encoder reported a count
1059 • A defective encoder.
(while at two consecutive floors) that was different from each
floor position count by more than adjustment P20.
• Other system fault interrupted the setup.
The selector setup was not completed - The selector setup
1060 • A defective CPU.
either failed or was terminated before completion.
• A defective selector
Selector setup position count table error - The setup has • A defective selector.
1061 determined that a value for a floor was invalid, and the setup • Wrong number of floors in the job image.
is invalidated. • Wrong job image.


Possible Causes:
• A defective encoder.
Possible Solutions:
• Check the slowdown magnets for gaps.
• Verify the P17 and/or P18 adjustments.
• The terminal slowdown (NTST input for top, NTSB input
1. Encoder interrupt failure - A car passed a slowdown for bottom) is reached too early (before the corresponding
point without receiving confirmation from the encoder. selector slowdown is reached). See P17 for top, and P18
1062
2. Improper normal terminal slowdown magnet for bottom.
placement. • If the NTSB input deactivates (metered logic) at the top
terminal, or if the NTST input deactivates (metered logic)
at the bottom terminal,
• A 1086 error is generated,
• A 1062 error is generated,
• The car will run at slow speed to next stop.
• Check the slowdown magnets for gaps.
• One or both sensors is out of adjustment.
Viscosity operation has detected activation of both low tem-
1067 • One or both sensors is defective.
perature and high temperature sensors at the same time.
• Input wiring error.
1068 Dual post jack resync fault. See WJR.
• Electrical noise affecting the power fail detection signal and/
False power failure error - The CPU received a false Non- or the power supply (check grounding and noise suppres-
1069 Maskable Interrupt (NMI), indicating an impending power fail- sion).
ure, and the power did not fail. • Power supply adjustment.
• Defective power supply.
LVU-LVD error - Neither of the LVU or the LVD leveling sensors
were active while the car was within the door zone.
1070 Minimum requirements: • Defective selector sensors.
• One sensor active within the door zone.
• Both sensors active at the floor level.
• A defective gate contact and/or door open limit.
• Improper wiring.
Car/Gate door open limit error - A fault has been detected
• Defective communication between the CPU Card and the
1073 due to the simultaneous activation of the car gate contact
electronic door operator.
and the door open limit.
• Defective CPU Card &/or electronic door operator.
• A defective DOL or CDCF input.
1074 Input PRSW Active (Pressure Switch). —
Car stop switch override error - The car stop switch override • A defective CSTOM input.
1075 circuit (controlled by CSTO output) has been detected faulty • A defective CSTO output.
by its monitoring CSTOM input, and the elevator shuts down. • Improper wiring.
Freight door interlock stuck error - The freight door interlock • A defective interlock.
1076 (FDI) has failed to close at the start of a run, or failed to open • A defective retiring cam.
at the end of a run. • Improper wiring.
Loss of encoder pulse train error - While the car was in
• A defective rotary encoder.
motion, the encoder motion signal pulse train (furnished by
1077 • Defective tape motion sensors.
either a tape or rotary encoder) was lost, and the elevator is
• Improper wiring.
shut down at a floor.
Low battery error - The 3-volt battery in the CPU Card is
either low or dead:
• This battery is required to ensure retention of job configu-
ration and adjustments. • A dead battery.
1078
• If the job configuration and adjustments are lost, then the • The battery is missing, or installed backwards.
job configuration must be uploaded again from IMS.
• Elevator adjustments may have to be repeated, including
scanning the hoistway to learn the floor positions.


Down run attempted but velocity stayed zero - The position • A defective position system (encoder/selector).
system specified determines the car velocity, and a down run • A car is bound and not able to move.
1079
is attempted. If the velocity returned by the position system • The position system adjustment does not match the pro-
remains zero, assume that the car has stalled. vided hardware.
• An invalid configuration or adjustment.
• Corrupted memory: load (generic and job image) software.
• A bad CPU Card.
• This error can also be generated by the following informa-
tion in the group memory:
• The number of floors = 0, or is greater than the maximum
Bad group job data - The group software cannot run. Stored
1080 number of floors permitted.
non-volatile data has invalid parameters in the group portion.
• The number of cars in the group = 0, or is greater than the
maximum number of cars permitted.
• The number of I/O = 0, or is greater than the maximum
number of I/O permitted.
• Rear operation is specified, but there are no rear openings
DIAGNOSTICS
specified.
Bad initialization of non-volatile memory - This fault can
occur if a new section of non-volatile memory is allocated by • Memory is temporarily unavailable - Reset the CPU.
software, but the memory was not available at that time. • A software error.
1081
Note: This fault can also occur when updating software or • Corrupted memory: load (generic and job image) software.
performing an INIT or INIT ALL. The Remote FAST (if open) • A bad CPU Card.
will display which section of non-volatile memory failed.
Bad save to non-volatile memory - This fault can occur if a
• Memory is temporarily unavailable - Reset the CPU.
save to non-volatile memory is attempted by software but the
• A software error.
1082 memory was not available at that time.
• Corrupted memory: load (generic and job image) software.
Note: The Remote FAST (if open) will display which section of
• A bad CPU Card.
non-volatile memory failed.
Bad recall of non-volatile memory - This fault can occur if: • Memory was temporarily unavailable - Reset the CPU.
• A recall from non-volatile memory is attempted by soft- • A job image error - Check for incorrect TAG sizes through
ware, but the memory was not available at that time, or the WRT Command.
1083 • If a memory segment is set to an invalid size, or • A job image error - Check for variables set incorrectly
• If a variable is set out of its valid range. The Remote FAST through the GET Command.
(if open) will display which section of non-volatile memory • Corrupted memory: load (generic and job image) software.
failed. • A bad CPU Card.
• For car nodes - Use the DCN Command to determine the CN
node ID (first failed node displays).
• Check all wiring and connections at the failing node.
• Invalid configuration - See the DCN Command and verify
1085 An SPI error has been detected on an CAN node.
that the port numbers are correct.
• Issue the TECC Command to make sure all of the nodes are
configured.
• A bad CN expansion or expansion card cable.


Normal terminal slowdown limit failure - This fault is normally
caused by a sensor, a CPU input, or magnet failure of NTST,
NTSB, TSR1, TSR2.
If the car is located at a terminal landing:
• The CPU inputs for that terminal did not drop out as
required to back up normal slowdown. The car is shut
down, with a service status of SELECTOR.
• The CPU inputs for the other terminal are not in the proper
state: • An invalid configuration or adjustment of magnets or selec-
• A 1086 error is logged, but the car is not shutdown. tor.
1086 • A 1062 error will be generated (on the very next run • Corrupted memory: load (generic and job image) software.
away from that terminal) and the car will run at slow • Bad sensors on TSMC.
speed to the next stop.
If the car is located at the bottom terminal:
• Two consecutive failures of NTSB must occur before the
car is shut down, and a 1086 fault is generated with each
failure.
If the car is located at the top terminal:
• A single failure of NTST, TSL1, or TSL2 will cause the car
to shut down.
• A failed output device on the IOF Card.
Valve Contact Off Error - This fault occurs when the car has
• A MUTS input has excessive voltage.
1087 no run request, but the MCD input indicates that the run cir-
• UTS output on EMS.
cuit contacts were active.
• A defective MCD input.
• A failed output device on the IOF Card.
Motor contactor Off - This fault occurs when the car does not • A MUTS input has excessive voltage.
1088 have a run request, but the MCE input indicates that the • UTS output on EMS.
motor contactor was still enabled. • A stuck motor contactor auxiliary contact.
• A defective MCE input.
• Faulty gate or locks.
• Jumpers on the gate or locks.
The car gate and door locks made, but the door close limit
1089 • A defective DCL or CDCF input.
(DCL) was not activated.
• Improper timing between the DCL6, the Gate Switch, the
Interlock, and the DCL.
Hoistway access monitor failure - This fault occurs when
1094 —
INHA and INHAM are in the same state.
Dynamic Sensor Failure -The car ran to the top landing and
1095 —
one of the dynamic sensors failed to activate.
Door bypass failure - This fault occurs when bypass switches • A defective I/O (CDBM/HDBM).
1100
are activated and car does not go on inspection operation. • A defective IOF (switch or input).
1101 The front gate made, and DCL did not activate. • A defective I/O (CDCF, DCL, or CDCFM).
1102 The rear gate made, and DCLR did not activate. • A defective I/O (CDCR, DCLR, or CDCRM.)
1103 Door communication loss was detected. —
• The car doors are clipping interlocks.
Gate and lock error - The gate and lock circuit opened during • A defective I/O (IF/IR/IB/IT/CF/CR/CT/CB).
1104
a run. • A defective gate contact.
• A defective I/O (CDCF/CDCR or DCL).
Car door lock error - The car door did not close when DCL
1105 • A defective car gate contact.
was made.
Excessive leveling time that exceeds the hysteresis set by
1107 —
adjustment P22
Start retry shutdown - The controller will shutdown after 6
1108 —
consecutive attempts to start a run.


• An input and its respective monitor indicates a logically
1110 A17/B44 shutdown error - Inspection to reset. impossible condition or failure; Top and bottom final limits
active at the same time.
1111 Indicates that the seismic sensor has been activated. —
1113 Car service protection is activated. —
Possible Causes:
• Leveling speed too fast.
• Defective magnet.
1114 Selector out of service fault - Door zone.
• Defective selector.
Possible Solution:
• RFL and cycle the inspection switch to reset.
1115 The car failed to run because the door held. —
• Controller too hot or cold as sensed by IOF Card’s tempera-
1116 Ambient temperature is out of range (-10°C. to 70°C.)
ture sensor.
The left dynamic jack sensor did not activate when it should • Improper left dynamic sensor installation.
1120
DIAGNOSTICS
have. • A defective left dynamic sensor.
The right dynamic jack sensor did not activate when it should • Improper left dynamic sensor installation.
1121
have. • A defective left dynamic sensor.
The car was already in slowdown when the dynamic jack
• Improper left dynamic sensor installation.
resynch sensors were activated.
1122 • A defective left dynamic sensor.
Note: Dynamic sensors should activate 12 inches before the
• The slowdown distance is too long.
slowdown point.·
1123 Up Run stalled. • Z44 value exceeded.
1124 Car top inspection Node B CAN communication is offline. —
1129 SEL Node A/B data mismatch. —
• Noise.
1130 Car top inspection Nodes A/B Data mismatch.
• DPIA Card.
1133 SEL Node A reported a duplicate node. —
1134 SEL Node B reported a duplicate node. —
1135 Car top inspection Node A reported a duplicate node. • DPIA not configured.
1136 Car top inspection Node B reported a duplicate node. • DPIA not configured.
1141 SEL Node A data error. —
1142 SEL Node B data error. —
• DPIA Card.
1143 Car top inspection Node A data error. • Car CAN issue.
• Noise.
• DPIA Card.
1144 Car top inspection Node B data error. • Car CAN issue.
• Noise.
• Check the selector.
Up Run stalled due to a command to Run Up, but no encoder
1150 • Z44 too short.
pulses were detected with Z44.
• Car not moving.
1151 SEL Node A SPI Loop Error. —
1152 SEL Node A CAN communication is offline. —
1153 SEL Node B CAN communication is offline. —
• DPIA Card.
1154 Car Top Inspection Node A CAN communication is offline. • Car CAN issue.
• Noise.
1155 DZ Node A CAN communication is offline. —
1156 DZ Node B CAN communication is offline. —
1157 DZ Node A/B data mismatch. —
1158 DZ Node A reported a duplicate node. —
1159 DZ Node B reported a duplicate node. —
1160 DZ Node A data error. —


1161 DZ Node B data error. —
1166 Low Pressure Active On Inspection - INHIBIT DOWN RUN —
1167 PU #3 - Electronic MCFC Fault —
1169 Auxiliary Power Unit Relay Monitor Fault. —
1170 Low Pressure Active On Inspection - INHIBIT DOWN RUN —
MCD failed to open - A run sequence was started and was
1501 waiting for MCD input to go active. The MCD input did not —
go active at the start of a run.
MCE dropped during run - MCE went active at the start of a
1502 —
run, but during the run, a loss of MCE was detected.
1520 The CANBus channel is turned Off. —
1521 CAN Channel 1 did not communicate. —
1524 Invalid CAN handle. —
1526 CAN Channel 1 did not receive a message for 60 sec. —
The controller has not received CAN data from the drive in
1529 0.4 seconds. The safety string opens, stopping all car Software error.
motion.
• Use the TFR Command to reset.
TSR overspeed detected - The monitoring input for the Fast • Cycle operation to inspection and back to automatic. This
Valve Solenoid (UFSM) has been seen as active when the fault indicates a timing issue with hardware on the IOF Card.
1530 selector/car is in a terminal floor zone and on the TSR tape Check all connections and verify no added relays to sole-
magnet. The TSRCPU output is turned off, stopping all car noid outputs. Slowdown magnet length wrong, valve mis-
motion. adjusted (not enough slowdown), P17 value too low.
Should this continue to happen, replace the IOF Card.
Valve input monitor failed - Valve monitoring inputs UFSM, • Cycle operation to inspection and back to automatic. This
USSM, DFSM, or DSSM have been detected in the wrong fault indicates a timing issue with hardware on the IOF Card.
1531 state (should always match their output counterparts UFS, Check all connections and verify no added relays to sole-
USS, DFS, or DSS). The TSRCPU output is turned off, stop- noid outputs. Slowdown magnet length wrong, valve mis-
ping all car motion. adjusted (not enough slowdown), P17 value too low.
Should this continue to happen, replace the IOF Card.
• Cycle operation to inspection and back to automatic. This
TSR input monitor failed - The TSRM monitoring input does
fault indicates a timing issue with hardware on the IOF Card.
1532 not match the TSR output. The safety string is opened, stop-
Check all connections and verify no added relays to sole-
ping all car motion.
noid outputs. Should this continue to happen, replace the
IOF Card.
FPGA detected door open outside of door zone - The safety fault indicates a timing issue with hardware on the IOF Card.
1533
string opens, stopping all car motion. Check all connections and verify no added relays to sole-
IOF Card.
• Use the CLR FLT button to reset.
FPGA detected an active fast valve solenoid (UFS or DFS out-
fault indicates a timing issue with hardware on the IOF Card.
1534 puts energized) when on hoistway access, inspection, or lev-
Check all connections and verify no added relays to sole-
eling -The safety string opens, stopping all car motion.
IOF Card.


FPGA detected invalid drive state - While on hoistway access • Use the CLR FLT button to reset.
or inspection with no inspection Up/Down button active, or • Cycle operation to inspection and back to automatic. This
while on door bypass with no controller/machine room fault indicates a timing issue with hardware on the IOF Card.
1535
inspection Up/Down button active, the valve has been Check all connections and verify no added relays to sole-
detected as energized - The safety string opens, stopping all noid outputs. Should this continue to happen, replace the
car motion. IOF Card.
FPGA detected invalid door bypass - The car door bypass or • Use the TFR Command to reset.
hoistway door bypass monitor inputs have been detected as • Cycle operation to inspection and back to automatic. This
active when door bypass switches are off, or internal hoist- fault indicates a timing issue with hardware on the IOF Card.
1536
way access bypass terms are active when the hoistway Check all connections and verify no added relays to sole-
access switches are off - The safety string opens, stopping noid outputs. Should this continue to happen, replace the
all car motion. IOF Card.
FPGA detected invalid door zone bypass - Internal door zone • Cycle operation to inspection and back to automatic. This
bypass terms have been detected as active when the car is fault indicates a timing issue with hardware on the IOF Card.
1537
DIAGNOSTICS
not in the door zone - The safety string opens, stopping all Check all connections and verify no added relays to sole-
car motion. noid outputs. Should this continue to happen, replace the
IOF Card.
• Remove the jumpers to restore operation.
FPGA detected programming jumpers active - When IOF Card • Cycle operation to inspection and back to automatic. This
jumpers JP2 or JP3 are placed in the 1-2 position to allow fault indicates a timing issue with hardware on the IOF Card.
1538
CPU programming of the FPGA's, this fault registers and the Check all connections and verify no added relays to sole-
safety string opens. noid outputs. Should this continue to happen, replace the
IOF Card.
Safety processor system detected ambient temperature out
of range - The ambient temperature sensor on the IOx has
• Resets when the detected temperature returns to the
1539 reported the controller temperature to be outside the accept-
acceptable range.
able range for continued operation (5°F to 167°F, or -15 °C to
75 °C). The safety string opens, stopping all car motion.
1540 FPGA has opened the safety string via the SAFCPU output. • Check other existing associated fault codes.
Motor starter monitor fault - The IO for starter control has
1541 been detected in an invalid state. Either MCC1/MCC1M or
• Cycle operation to inspection and back to automatic.
MCC2/MCC2M are in unequal states.
1685 Invalid CN version. • Update CN software or replace the CN Card.
Possible Cause:
• CN/HN has a safety critical I/O, and it did not respond to the
1687 CN No Poll Response - The inputs are cleared. controller’s request. All I/Os on that node are cleared.
Possible Solution:
• Check power and communication to that node.
Possible Cause:
1689 Maximum Safety Nodes Exceeded - The car was shutdown. • The job configuration has too many CN ports with safety I/
Os on it.
Invalid CN Configuration - The job configuration has an
1690 —
invalid CN configuration.
1691 Invalid message ID on Channel 1. —
1705 End of run test failed circuits. —
Rear selector vane set but I/O not present - P12>0, but is
1707 —
missing the rear selector input.
• Reload generic and job image.
1726 Thread non-responsive.
• Replace CPU.
• Check power supply for proper current rating.
1850 Power disturbance detected on P24 volt power supply.
• Check grounds, etc.


Possible Cause:
• Noise issue.
1851 Hardware watchdog has occurred.
Possible Solution:
• Check grounding to the IOF Card.
Possible Cause:
1852 Power loss interrupt failed (should never happen).
• A hardware or software problem.
Possible Cause:
• Manufacturing did not properly set the MAC address.
1853 Invalid MAC Address - The Ethernet port is disabled.
Possible Solution:
• Replace the CPUC Card.
• Magnet placement.
• Noise on Car CAN.
1854 LU/LD stuck error.
• Car CAN loading.
• Failed TSM Card.
Software error - The system attempted to validate an I/O
1857 prior to the I/O database being initialized (should never hap- —
pen).
1858 Gate contact did not close. —
• Check F1 on the IOF Card.
1859 Discrete SPI HW failure - A CPU/IOF hardware failure. • Reload generic and job software.
• Replace the IOF Card.
1860 Inspection node offline. • DPIA communication issue.
1861 The power-on self test failed. —
An invalid generic software version - The software version
1862 does not match the job number. The car is shutdown until the —
valid generic software is installed.
1865 A job file image is missing. • Reload generic and job software.
1866 Flash job file image is corrupted. • Reload generic and job software.
1867 The battery-backed RAM job file is corrupt. • Reload generic and job software.
1868 DZ1 is stuck active during a run. • Check the selector.
1869 DZ2 is stuck active during a run. • Check the selector.
1870 Stuck car call detected. —
1878 Stuck hall call button detected. —
Safety processor configuration invalid - At power-up, the CPU
1920 • Use the SPC Command.
Card detects an invalid IOF Card configuration.
Safety processor not online - At power-up, CPU did not • Communication disruption of the Car CAN Channel.
1921 detect IOF Card safety processor communicating over car • A defective CPU.
CANbus. • A defective IOF Card.
• Communication disruption of the Car CAN Channel.
1922 NTSD processor not online.
• A defective IOF Card.
1925 SP I/O mismatch with CPU. —
1926 NP I/O mismatch with CPU. —
Possible Causes:
• LD Relays are Bad.
LULDM has detected an illegal state based on LUO and LDO
1955 • Wiring Issue: LUO, LDO, or LULDM I/O Circuits.
outputs.
Possible Solutions:
• Reset through Inspection Operation.
3001 A call was lost because a car went out of service. —
3003 The emergency phone detected failure of the phone line. —

Diagnostics Section SP Fault Codes - Safety Processor
SP Fault Codes - Safety Processor

Code Description Possible Solutions
Terminal speed reduction device activated – The SP detected • Check the motor and valves
2701
Up Fast active while the TSR1 or TSR2 magnets were active. • Check the TSR1 and TSR2 magnets
• Check the motor and valves.
Excessive HWAC/Inspection speed detected – The SP
• Invalid encoder scaling.
detected Up Fast or Down Fast active while on inspection
2702 • Invalid contactor monitor inputs.
operation.The safety processor opens the safety string via the
• This condition is latched through a power cycle, and is
SAFSP output.
only reset through the SFR Command.
Revert from car top inspection to automatic detected – The
2703 SP detected Up or Down solenoids active while on car top
inspection without car top inspection run inputs.
Revert from bypass operation to automatic detected - The
2704 SP detected Up or Down solenoids active while on bypass • Failed outputs on the IOF Card.
operation. • Check solenoid output wiring and voltages.
DIAGNOSTICS
Revert from hoistway access operation to automatic detected - • Voltage present on outputs with no demand means
2705 The SP detected Up or Down solenoids active while on hoistway failed IOF Card output device(s).
access operation without hoistway access run inputs.
Revert from machine room inspection to automatic detected -
2706 The SP detected Up or Down solenoids active while on machine
room inspection without machine room inspection run inputs.
• Check the car top inspection inputs.
2707 During car top inspection an invalid I/O was detected. • Check the car CAN channel.
• Check the DPIA.
• Check the car door bypass switch.
2708 During bypass operation an invalid I/O was detected.
• Check the hoistway door bypass switch.
• Check the hoistway access inputs.
2709 During hoistway access operation an invalid I/O was detected. • Check the car CAN channel.
• Check the DPIA.
• Check the machine room inspection switch.
2710 During machine room inspection, an invalid I/O was detected.
• Check the machine room inspection buttons.
Bottom limit override crosscheck failure - The SP detected that • Check BLO.
2711
BLO and BLOM are in the same state. • Check BLOM.
The test outputs were not commanded within three (3) auto- • Reload the generic and job software.
2712
matic runs. • Replace the CPU Card.
• Check Real Time Motion > Show Faults
2713 Safety string output test failure. • Check all wiring/connections to the IOF Card.
• IOF Card device failure - Try RFL, TFR, and cycle INSP to
2714 CHKHA crosscheck failure.
reset. If it returns or is chronic, replace the IOF Card.
• Check the car CAN channel.
2715 TSMC data message was not received.
• Check TSMC.
2716 Car top data message was not received.
• Check the DPIA.
2717 Top hoistway access data message was not received. • Check the hall CAN channel
2718 Bottom hoistway access data message was not received. • Check the HN Board
• Check Car CAN loading, connections, and cable routing.
2719 A corrupted TSMC Node A CAN message was received.
• Replace the TSM Card.
2720 A corrupted TSMC Node B CAN message was received.
• Replace the TSM Card.
2721 A corrupted car top CAN message was received.
• Replace the DPIA Card.
2722 A corrupted top hoistway access CAN message was received. —

SP Fault Codes - Safety Processor Diagnostics Section
Code Description (cont.) Possible Solutions

A corrupted bottom hoistway access CAN message was
2723 —
received.
• Check Car CAN loading, connections and cable routing.
2724 A corrupted main CPU CAN message was received. • Indicates noise on the Car CAN channel or failing com-
munication chip on the CPU.
2725 A duplicate TSMC Node was detected. • Verify that there is only one TSMC connected.
• Verify that there is only one DPIA connected.
2726 A duplicate car top node was detected.
• Perform SPC, then TECC the nodes.
2729 A car CAN channel bus Off failure. • Check the car CAN termination.
2730 A hall CAN channel bus Off failure. • Check the hall CAN termination.
2731 An input failure was detected. —
2732 A programming jumper was enabled. —
A/C peak reference timeout – The SP has lost A/C power, so the
2733 • Failed device on the IOF Card.
A/C inputs cannot be sampled.
2734 A relevel with FAST solenoid detected. —
2735 Car top inspection node crosscheck error. • Check DPIA connections.
• Failing input/output on the IOF Card - Try RFL, TFR, and
cycle INSP to reset.
2738 TSRCPM lost during output test.
• Verify that the valve solenoid wiring matches the wiring
diagrams.
• Check power to the selector. Check Car CAN channel.
2739 TSMC message was not received at power ON.
replace TSMC.
2740 Car top inspection message was not received at power ON. • Check Car CAN channel and DPIA Card.
2741 A corrupted TSMC Node A terminal message. • Indicates noise on the Car CAN channel or failing com-
munication chip on the TSMC.
2742 A corrupted TSMC Node A version message. • Indicates noise on the Car CAN channel or failing com-
2743 A corrupted car top inspection CAN message. • Check Car CAN channel and DPIA Card.
2744 A corrupted top HWAC CAN message version. —
2745 A corrupted bottom HWAC CAN message version. —
2746 TSMC Node A / Node B data crosscheck error. • Indicates noise on the Car CAN channel or failing com-
2747 Selector B CAN communication time out detected. • Indicates noise on the Car CAN channel or failing com-
2748 Car Top B CAN communication time out detected. • Check Car CAN channel and DPIA Card.
2756 Car top B message timeout. • Indicates noise on the Car CAN channel or failing com-
2751 Duplicate Selector B node detected. • Indicates noise on the Car CAN channel or failing com-
2752 Duplicate car top B node detected. • Indicates noise on the Car CAN channel or failing com-
Terminal Speed Reduction activated. Safety Processor detected • Check NTS magnets (polarity and position).
2756
overspeed into top terminal landing. • Check UFS output and wiring.

Diagnostics Section NP Fault Codes - NTSD Processor
NP Fault Codes - NTSD Processor

Code Description Possible Solutions
The top terminal slowdown was activated – NP • Check the NTST magnet; P17 adjustment too low.
2801
detected NTST active while running Up Fast. • Check the motor and valves.
The bottom terminal slowdown was activated
• Check the NTSB magnet; P18 adjustment too low.
2802 – The NP detected NTST active while running
• Check the motor and valves.
Up Fast.
The top terminal stopping was activated – The • Check the NTST magnet; P17 adjustment too low.
2803 NP detected DL active and NTST active while • Check the motor and valves.
running Up. • Check the DL magnet.
The bottom terminal stopping was activated – • Check the NTSB magnet; P18 adjustment too low.
2804 The NP detected DL active and NTST active • Check the motor and valves.
while running Up. • Check the DL magnet.
The test outputs were not commanded within • Reload the generic and job software.
2805
three automatic runs. • Replace the CPU Card.
DIAGNOSTICS
• RFL, RRF.
2806 A FAST solenoid output test failure. • Use a meter to check the UFSM input during an Auto Up run. If no VAC,
then use job diagrams to troubleshoot the output voltage supply.
• Issue an FLT command.
2807 A safety string output test failure. • Check all wiring/connections to the IOF Card.
2808 TSMC data message Node A was not received.
• Check the TSMC.
A corrupted TSMC Node A CAN message was • Check the Car CAN loading, the connections, and the cable routing.
2809
received. • Replace the TSM Card.
A corrupted TSMC Node B CAN message was • Check the Car CAN loading, the connections, and the cable routing.
2810
received. • Replace the TSM Card.
A corrupted main CPU CAN message was • Noise on Car CAN channel or failing communication chip on CPU.
2811
received • Check the Car CAN loading, the connections, and the cable routing.
2812 A duplicate TSMC Node A was detected. —
• Check Car CAN channel loading, cable routing, shielding, & connec-
2813 A car CAN channel bus Off failure.
tions.
2814 A programming jumper was enabled. —
A/C peak reference timeout - The NP lost A/C
2815 • Failed device on the IOF Card.
power, so the A/C inputs cannot be sampled.
2816 A duplicate TSMC Node B was detected. —
A TSMC data message Node B was not • Check the car CAN channel.
2817
received. • Check the TSMC.
A TSMC Node A and Node B data
2818 —
mismatched.
2819 NP failed to configure the IOF FPGA. • Perform SPC again. If a persistent fault, replace the IOF Card.
2820 Bottom limit override and running fast. • Check DFS output and solenoid wiring.
• Failing input/output on IOF Card - Try RFL, TFR, & cycle INSP to reset.
2821 TSRCPM went false during fast valve test.
• Verify that the valve solenoid wiring matches the wiring diagrams.
TSRCPM went false during safety string output • Failing input/output on IOF Card - Try RFL, TFR, & cycle INSP to reset.
2822
test. • Verify that the valve solenoid wiring matches the wiring diagrams.
• Check power to the selector.
2823 Selector message timed out at power ON. • Check the Car CAN channel.
• Replace the TSMC.
• Noise on Car CAN channel or failing communication chip on TSMC.
2824 Selector Node A corrupted version message.
• Noise on Car CAN channel or failing communication chip on CPU.
2825 Selector Node B corrupted version message.

WPT Diagnostics Diagnostics Section
WPT Diagnostics
WPT Tool
Fault Codes Label Description
3402/3702 PS Parameter set error
3403/3703 EE EEPROM writing or reading fault
3404/3704 OC Overcurrent
3405/3705 RS Faulty reference switch
3406/3706 IE Internal software fault
3407/3707 AP Fault by position counter, door width > 3.5m
3408/3708 TS Faulty temperature sensor
3409/3709 NE Encoder not connected
3410/3710 CF Closing force potentiometer defect
3411/3711 ME Fault by motor or encoder
3412/3712 SS Standstill fault, door is blocked
3413/3713 TH Temperature of the electronic or motor too high
3414/3714 FE Set during manual change of coupler movement parameter
3415/3715 ES Fault by encoder, signals out of limits
3416/3716 PI Position input (ABSPOS) Invalid
3418/3718 BE Electrical error during rotor angle detection, no current is flowing (motor not connected)
3419/3719 BM Mechanical error during rotor angle detection; door stalled wrong rotation direction; press LEARN
3450/3750 -- Software timing error --- only IE is set
3451/3751 -- Wrong interrupt warning --- only IE is set
3452/3752 -- Stack size error --- only new software start-up
3453/3753 -- SCI send error --- only ICE
3454/3754 -- Software-watchdog failed --- only new software start-up
3455/3755 -- Flash cannot be read
3456/3756 -- Flash checksum wrong
3457/3757 -- Illegal state-machine state
3458/3758 -- EEPROM protection error
3459/3759 -- RAM protection error
3464/3764 -- Learn bits protection error
3465/3765 -- mfu.flag.dc_mode bit protection error
3466/3766 -- Learn bits protection error
3480/3780 -- Unknown reset source detected
3481/3781 -- Illegal address reset detected
3482/3782 -- Watchdog reset detected
3483/3783 -- Closing over-speed detected
3490/3790 -- Current offset measurement failed

TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION
TROUBLESHOOTING SECTION
Troubleshooting Section Contents
Contents
Controller CAN System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Configure the CAN Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
CAN Node Address Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
CAN Channel Resistive Loading Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Car CAN Channel 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Hall CAN Channel 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Group CAN Channel Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
CAN Channel Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Correct an Offline CAN Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Ping a CN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Troubleshooting I/O Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
I/O Reference Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Selector I/O Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Troubleshooting Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
CE MicroComm Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Motor Data for Siemens Electronic Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Transformer Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
On-Card Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
IOF Card (6300AHV001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
IOF - LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
IOF - Shunt Jumper Definitions/Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
IOF - CON Jumper Definitions/Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
IOF - Push Buttons and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
IOF Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
IOF Connectors/Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
CPUC Card (6300AHT001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
CPUC - LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
CPUC - Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
CPUC Shunt Jumper Definitions and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
CPUC Power Supply Tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
CPUC Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
CAN Node - LED Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
CAN Node Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
LHV Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
L24/LHV/S24-1/S24-2 Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
CAN Selector LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Contents Troubleshooting Section
This page
intentionally
left blank.

Troubleshooting Section Controller CAN System Overview
Controller CAN System Overview

Located Inside the Controller
CPUC
(Mounted on the IOF)
120 ohm 120 ohm 120 ohm
Safety Nodes
Group CAN Bus
Hall CAN Bus

HC 1H/HC 1L
Car CAN Bus
(Local I/O)
CCH/CCL
RCH/RCL
SPI Bus
IOF
Discrete Interface
Hoistway Access
Inputs, Valve, Starter,
Viscosity Sensor, IOF
Pressure Switch,
18 Spare Active
Low I/O
TROUBLESHOOTING
To other controllers Group CAN Bus
in the same group. RCH/RCL CCH/CCL
Group CAN Segment
CE
DPIA MicroComm
Card
Located in the Car
Selector Car CAN Bus

CNA**
CCH/CCL
(MODCTRL 1)
Front Door
Operator
Rear Door
Operator Hall Calls, Fire Service, and
other Riser Function I/O
Car Top
Inspection
Switches
Cross-Connect
COP I/O to other Cars
(Car Calls, Fire in the Group
Service, etc.)
**MODCTRL 1 CNA handles the
Group and Car I/O. If additional
I/O are required, the smartname
Channel 2 - Car CAN Bus Section will increase with each additional
CNA, e.g., MODCTRL 2.

Configure the CAN Nodes Troubleshooting Section
Configure the CAN Nodes

1. Have some paper and pen/pencil ready to record node information for future use.
2. Access the UIT.
3. Navigate to BLOCK SELECT ADJUSTMENTS, and press ENTER.
BLOCK SELECT
ADJUSTMENTS
4. Navigate to ADJUST MENU COMMANDS START UP, and press ENTER.
ADJUST MENU
COMMANDS STARTUP
5. After DCN displays, press ENTER.
DCN— Display Sta

UP: Next DN: Prev
6. CN Node = 0 displays. Press UP or DOWN to select the proper CAN Node ID, and
press ENTER.
CN Node=0
UP:+ DN:—
7. When Ping a Port? displays, press DOWN.

Troubleshooting Section Configure the CAN Nodes

(continued)
The CN Node ID (selected from step 6) displays, followed by its SmartName. The
DCN information will begin to scroll from left to right on both lines at different rates as
follows. Press UP or DOWN at any point to pause the scrolling.
CN:1 CNAMAIN1--- ONLINE:1 Pcks:86 CH:2 v:32 uP18Fxxxx SP:0 TP:12

Ports: 3, 24, 25, 26, 2, 23, 24, 2, 255, 255, 255
Top Line Display Bottom

Top Line Display
Line
CN: The node ID Display
CNAMAIN1 SmartName
Online: Online status: 0 = Offline, 1 = Online
Pcks: # of received data packets
CH: CAN channel from which the node is assigned to
TROUBLESHOOTING
communicate: 2 = Car, 3 = Hall
V: Software version
uP18Fxxxx microprocessor version for that node
SP: # of shared ports
TP: # of total ports assigned to the node
Bottom Line Display
Port assignments for ports 0 (zero) through 15 = the numbers
represent the port number of the I/O map the port is to use, and all
unused ports for a node receive a port assignment of 255.
CNA Cards always have 12 total ports assigned to them.
8. Record the CN, the SmartName, and the CH information.

ICON32 Controllers always have MODCTRL1 on CH:2 as node 0 (zero). Additional

nodes are optional per job requirements.
9. Press ESC.
10. Repeat step 6 through step 9 for each node 0-11.
11. Verify the addressing jumpers for any CAN Node Card used in the system. See
Table 1 on page 4-6.

A CAN Node may be CN, CNA, or any future CAN Node Card.The jumper

assignments are the same.

Configure the CAN Nodes Troubleshooting Section

(continued)
CN Card Node Addressing
JP7 JP6 JP5 JP4
CN Card 0 Off Off Off Off
CN Card 1 Off Off Off On
CN Card 2 Off Off On Off
CN Card 3 Off Off On On
CN Card 4 Off On Off Off
CN Card 5 Off On Off On
CN Card 6 Off On On Off
CN Card 7 Off On On On
CN Card 8 On Off Off Off
CN Card 9 On Off Off On
CN Card 10 On Off On Off
CN Card 11 On Off On On
Table 1 - CN Card Node Addressing
12. Verify that JP14 is ON pins 1-2.

13. Verify that JP8 is OFF.
14. Confirm that any CAN Node designated "CH:2" is wired to CCH/CCL. See job prints.
15. Confirm that any CAN Node designated "CH:3" is wired to HC1H/HC1L. See job prints.
16. Remove power from the controller.
17. Check resistance between CCH and CCL on the IOF (60 ohms +/-3 ohms is typical).
• If the resistance is correct, continue this procedure.
• If the resistance is not correct, go to CAN Channel Resistive Loading Verification
on page 4-7.
18. If any node has been designated "CH:3," remove power from all controllers currently
crossed connected within the group.
19. Check resistance between HC1H and HC1L on the IOF (60 ohms +/-3 ohms is typical).
• If the resistance is correct, continue this procedure.
• If the resistance is not correct, go to go to CAN Channel Resistive Loading Verifica-
tion on page 4-7.
20. Restore power to any controllers previously de-energized.
21. Issue a TECC Command.
Block Select Adjustments > Commands Startup > TECC.
22. Issue a DCN Command.
Block Select Adjustments > Commands Startup > DCN.
23. Verify that all nodes with SmartName previously recorded from step 8 on page 4-5 are
reported as being ONLINE:1.

Troubleshooting Section CAN Channel Resistive Loading Verification
CAN Channel Resistive Loading Verification

After correcting CAN loading, issue a TECC Command to ensure the cards are properly configured.
Car CAN Channel 2

• The CAN Channel Troubleshooting Guide is located on page 4-10.
60 ohms is the optimal loading for CAN communications.
1. Position the car so that there is access to the operating panels, and verify that
the controller is de-energized.
3. In the COP, verify that a 121 ohm axial leaded resistor is installed across the CCH
and CCL rail terminals.
TROUBLESHOOTING
4. In the controller, verify that the CPUC Card jumpers CCC and CCT are ON. See
Figure 1.
5. In the controller, verify that R120 on the MODCTRL1 CNA Card is not installed.
The CNA Card is located on the center divider panel.
6. For cars with more than one CNA assigned to the Car CAN Channel:
a. Verify that the nodes are connected in parallel (daisy-chained).
b. Verify that none of the CNA Cards have R120 populated.
CPUC CARD
JUMPER CCC=ON
CNA CARD
JUMPER CCT=ON
R120 Node
Figure 1 - CPUC and CNA Cards

CAN Channel Resistive Loading Verification Troubleshooting Section
Car CAN Channel 2

(continued)
7. On the freight door interface box (or other interface box types):
a. Remove R20 and R21 from the CN Card.
b. Remove R120 from the CNA Card.

Not all freight door interface boxes use CAN node direct interfacing, some use relays con-

trolled from I/O’s located in other components of the control system.
8. With all nodes connected (and power off), measure resistance from any node in the
system between CCH and CCL to confirm the resistive load is 60 ohms +/- 3 ohms.
Hall CAN Channel 3

This section only applies to engineered (custom) jobs where CAN nodes are assigned to
the hall channel (CH:3).
Perform this procedure if a Hall CAN channel is used each time a new controller is started
up, including grouping the new controller to an already running controller.
1. Turn OFF, Lockout, and Tagout the mainline disconnect for all controllers in the group.
2. Verify the following configurations. See Figure 2 on page 4-9.

a. CPUC jumpers are ON for the first and last controller, based on the physical order
of connections in the machine room.
• HC1C = ON.
• HC1T = ON.
b. CN Card.
• R20 and R21 installed.
• JP11 = 1-2.
• JP12 = 1-2.
c. CNA Card.
• R120 installed.

HC1H/HC1L cross-connects on CON40 of the IOF Card should be installed and cross-wired

to properly verify loading for the whole group.
3. Measure the following resistances to confirm the resistive load is 60 ohms +/- 3 ohms.
a. The IOF Card between HC1H and HC1L.
b. The lobby panel interface box (or other interface box node) between HC1H and
HC1L.

Troubleshooting Section CAN Channel Resistive Loading Verification
Hall CAN Channel 3

(continued) 4. Issue a TECC Command.
Block Select Adjustments > Commands Startup > TECC.
5. Issue a DCN Command.

Block Select Adjustments > Commands Startup > DCN.
6. Verify that all previously recorded nodes with SmartNames are reported as
ONLINE:1.
Hall CAN bus HC1H/HC1L Cross Connects
Car 2 Car 1 Car 4 Car 3

CON40 CON40 Jumpers HC1C & CON40 Jumpers HC1C & CON40
Jumpers HC1C & Jumpers HC1C &
HC1T INSTALLED HC1T REMOVED HC1T REMOVED
CPUC CPUC CPUC CPUC HC1T INSTALLED
IOF IOF IOF IOF
TROUBLESHOOTING
Figure 2 - Hall CAN Termination
Group CAN Channel Termination
Connect either Ethernet or RCH/RCL for group communications, but not both.

Recommended Installation as a backup for Ethernet group communications:
1. Pull and wire the CAN communication.
2. Verify the group communication function.
3. Leave the RCH/RCL wires disconnected; if left unplugged, then CON40 with
other cross-connects would be unplugged from the controller until needed.
Group CAN Channel (RCH/RCL)
1. Cross-connect RCH/RCL between all cars in group. See Figure 3 on page 4-10.
2. Enable the terminating resistor on the CPUC for the controllers on each end of
the cross-connect.
» Install RCT and RCC.
3. Disable the terminating resistor on all other CPUC Cards of the remaining
(intermediate) controllers in the group.
» Remove RCT and RCC.

CAN Channel Resistive Loading Verification Troubleshooting Section
Group CAN Channel Termination

(continued)
Group CAN bus RCH/RCL Cross Connects
CON40 CON40 Jumpers RCC & CON40 Jumpers RCC & CON40
Jumpers RCC & Jumpers RCC &
RCT INSTALLED RCT REMOVED RCT REMOVED
CPUC CPUC CPUC CPUC RCT INSTALLED
IOF IOF IOF IOF
Figure 3 - Controller Group CAN Cross-Connects
CAN Channel Troubleshooting Guide
Car CAN Link (CCH/CCL)

Indication Problem Verification
Resistance reads ~60 ohms. N/A N/A
Verify the correct jumper and resistor
Resistance does not read ~60 Termination jumpers and resistors
CCH to CCL settings on CPUA and all termination
ohms. are set incorrectly.
points on the CC link.
Wires crossed, wrong value for
Resistance is not a divisor of
termination resistors, or shorts to Verify and correct.
120 ohms.
other circuits.
Resistance reads Open Circuit. N/A N/A
CCH/CCL to Resistance = measurement
A short between SHCC and CCH(L). Verify and correct.
SHCC between CCH and CCL.
Resistance is not the value
Shorts to other circuits. Verify and correct.
measured between CCH and CCL.
Hall CAN Link (HC1H/HC1L), only required when there is a node present on CH3
Resistance reads ~60 ohms. N/A N/A
Verify the correct jumper and resistor
HC1H to Resistance does not read ~60 Termination jumpers and resistors
settings on CPUA and all termination
HC1L ohms. are set incorrectly.
points on the HC1 Link.
Wires crossed, wrong value for
Resistance is not a divisor of 120
termination resistors, or shorts to Verify and correct.
ohms.
other circuits.
Resistance reads Open Circuit. N/A N/A
HC1H or
Resistance = measurement A short between SHHC1 and HC1H
HC1L Verify and correct.
between HC1H and HC1L. or HC1L.
to SHHC1
Resistance is not the value mea-
Shorts to other circuits. Verify and correct.
sured between HC1H and HC1L.

Troubleshooting Section Correct an Offline CAN Node
Correct an Offline CAN Node Issue a DCN

Command
1. Before performing this procedure, verify the following: The CAN nodes and status
will display either a
a. THY02 Card: SW1-3 = ON. 1 = online
or a
b. Every CAN Node JP14 =1-2. 0 = offline
right side of the node name.
2. Cycle power to the system (if it was necessary
to correct a jumper position).
Process Does the node status
Complete indicate 0 = offline?
IF NO
IF YES
1. Place the controller on Inspection Service.

2. Issue a TECC Command, then a DCN Command.
TROUBLESHOOTING
3. Verify the node status.
Process Does the node status

Complete indicate 0 = offline?
IF NO
IF YES
Locate the node and
confirm that the node
has power and that
the fuses are good.
Confirm that the

logical address
jumpers of the
node are correct.
With power OFF,

check the resistive
load on the respective
CAN channel.
Correct With all plugs properly

Resistive landed, is the resistive load
Loading appx. 60 ohms?
IF NO
IF YES
Replace the node.

Correct an Offline CAN Node Troubleshooting Section
Ping a CN Port 1. Issue a DCN Command.

Block Select Adjustments > Commands Startup > DCN > ENTER.
2. Press UP or DOWN to select the proper CN Node number, press ENTER, and Ping a
Port? displays.
3. Press UP, and then press UP or DOWN to select the port of interest.
4. Press ENTER, and the selected CN Card displays. The ping information scrolls across
the display. See Figure 4.
DCN –Display Stats CN:n NodeName----Online:n Pcks:n Ch:n v:n uPLPC23xxSP:n TP:n
Up: Next DN: Prev Ports: n, n+1, n+2, 255, n+4 ...
ENTER CN: CN Node ID (selected).

NodeName: name assigned to the node selected.
----Online: online status;
CN Node: (0-11)
Up: + DN: - 1 = online, 0 = offline
Pcks: number of data packets received.
Ch: CAN channel node is assigned;
ENTER
2 = CCH/CCL, 3 = HC1H/HC1L
v : node software version.
Ping a Port? uPLPC23xx: node hardware version.
Up: Yes DN: No NO SP: number of Shared Ports assigned the node.
TP: number of Total Ports assigned the node.
YES Ports: lists the control system port number assigned
to the node’s physical I/O port (255 is an unassigned port).
A node card having 12 ports will have 12 ports listed,
CNn Port: (0-16) only the used ports will have a port number assigned.
UP: + DN: -
CN: CN Node selected previously.

ENTER Port: Port number selected previously.
v: node software version.
LPC23xx: node hardware version.
CNn Portn v:# LPC23xx Bit: bit assignment.
**Bit#, IOName, Data, IO, Call IOName: I/O name assigned to bit.
Data: indicates I/O state;
1–inactive, 0–active.
IO: indicates I/O as input or output;
1–input, 0–output.
Call: indicates I/O as a hall/car call;
1–call, 0–non-call.
Figure 4 - Ping a CN Port Flowchart

Troubleshooting Section Troubleshooting I/O Issues

I/O Reference Table
Correct I/O I/O Number
Port # Pattern 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 01000101 INCN INCNM INCNU INCND CDBM CDBM2 HDBM HDBM2
2 00000000 BYCST BYHA BYHAR BYHAB BYHAT BYCDB BYHDB BYDZ
3 11111111 IB IT IF IR CB CT CF CR
4 11111111 SAFSPM SAFCPU SAFCPM SAFE TSRCPU CDCF CDCR CST
5 010000-- MCC1 MCC2 UFS USS DFS DSS --- ---
6 010000-- MCC1M MCC2M UFSM USSM DFSM DSSM --- ---
7 0001-101 MUTS MCF MCE MCD --- PRSW OLTS OLTO
8 100-0100 BLOM BLO CHKBLO --- CHKTSR CHKDS TSRCPM NTSNPM
9 ------------ TPDR TPDL TPSR/TP3SR TPSL/TPESL --- DD --- ---
10 00000001 FSM FSX FSE FST FSSR STBC EPW EPNP
11 10101010 HATU HATUM HATD HATDM HABU HABUM HABD HABDM
15
TROUBLESHOOTING
See Selector I/O Troubleshooting Section
16
17 00000101 INCTM INCTU INCTD INCTU2 INCTD2 INCT INHA INHAM
LEGEND Table 2 - I/O Port # and I/O Correct Pattern

‘---’ = Irrelevant Ready to Run - Controller Inspection
BOLD = I/O Always Present
I/O State = INACTIVE
I/O State = ACTIVE
ITALICIZED = Optional I/O

• SAFE, CDCF, CDCR, CST and all interlock inputs (port 3) must be active with no

critical controller faults in order for SAFSPM, SAFCPU, SAFCPM, and TSRCPU to
be active.
• Any optional I/O present in the job software must be in the indicated state for the
Correct I/O Pattern column.
• MCC2, MCC2M = Only seen on jobs with electronic or Wye-Delta starting.
• MUTS, MCF = Only seen on jobs with electronic starting.
• MCE, MCD = Only seen on jobs with across-the-line (1 contactor) starting.
• PRSW = Only seen on jobs equipped with a low pressure switch.
• OLTS, OLTO = Only seen on jobs equipped with viscosity control thermostats.
• INHA, INHAM = Only seen on jobs with hoistway access.
• Bit Patterns provided are for jobs with electronic starting and hoistway access.
• I/O locations marked with an X are either unassigned or have a signal assigned
whose status is unimportant at this point. If required, see job’s Car I/O Assign-
ment Sheet.

Troubleshooting I/O Issues Troubleshooting Section

(continued)
1. Check the controller fault log for applicable faults.
2. If Ports 1 - 10 all display zeros, both the Safety Processor and the NTSD Processor
have mismatched I/O with the CPU.
a. Check the F1 pico fuse on the IOF Card.
b. Reload the controller generic files and the job configuration files. See Upload Soft-
ware to CPU Cards on page 6-36.
c. Configure the Safety Processor. See page 2-8.
d. From Startup Wizard, scroll to Clear HN Config? > Config HN/CN > Verify All CN's.
3. If the SP and NP I/O mismatch faults still exist, then communication is faulty between
the IOF and the CPUC. Replace the IOF or CPUC Cards.
Selector I/O Troubleshooting
Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8

Port 15
LVU LVD DZ1 DZ2 LVUR* LVDR* DZ1R* DZ2R*
@1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Car Position
On Directional Limit Bottom 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0

@top landing 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
On Directional Limit Top 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8

Port 16
TSR1 TSR2 NTST NTSB DL x x x
@1 0 0 0 1 0 x x x
Car Position
On Directional Limit Bottom 0 0 0 1 1 x x x

@top landing 1 1 1 0 0 x x x
On Directional Limit Top 1 1 1 0 1 x x x
Table 3 - Correct Selector I/O States
• LVUR*, LVDR*,DZ1R*, DZ2R* are only used for close floors—for that close floor,
activate these I/Os instead of LVU, LVD, DZ1, DZ2.
• The I/O states for Bits 5-8 are a copy of the first four bits shown in Port 15 at a close
landing; requires P12=1.

Troubleshooting Section Troubleshooting Guide
Troubleshooting Guide
Problem and
Possible Solutions
Possible Causes
Car will not move from 1. Check EPNP. It should be active for normal power. Can prevent Up runs depending on E10
Car Top Inspection value.
Operation with I/O & 2. Check PRSW. It should be active for normal conditions, and will prevent Down runs.
safety string checkout 3. Check OLTO. It should be active for normal conditions, and will prevent UP runs.
performed • 1074 fault is issued for inactive PRSW input.
• 1019 fault is issued after a run attempt with OLTO inactive.
4. Verify that the appropriate INCTx inputs activate from the inspection button activation.
5. Troubleshoot the inspection station wiring per the job prints.
Safety Processor (SP) • The SP monitors the safety critical inputs of the elevator system using safety nodes.
bad LED • The SP monitors inputs for these functions: Door State, Door Bypassing, Inspection Opera-
tion (including Hoistway Access), Terminal Speed Reduction, and Speed Limit Enforcement.
• All of these except Terminal Speed Reduction are also monitored by the CPU and the PLD.
• In the event a safety node fails, loses communication, or reports an I/O state that disagrees
with another monitoring subsystem, the SP BAD illuminates and faults are logged.
• It is normal for the SP to remove power to the safety string without logging any faults for
TROUBLESHOOTING
conditions that are considered normal operation.
Example: IF/IR/IT/IB and no DCL = An open car door, SP inhibits a run until door is closed
(or bypassed).
Safety Processor not 1. Configure the Safety Processor.
configured for the job 2. Clear the faults by navigating to the Real Time Motion screen.
a. Press ENTER, and then press ENTER a second time.
b. Press UP and DN until Reset Faults appears in the display window.
c. Press ENTER.
d. Press UP until Show Faults appears in the display window.
e. Determine if the controller has issued any faults.
Pay specific attention to the 27xx fault series, as they are Safety Processor Faults. To cor-
rect these faults, see the Diagnostics section.
3. Disconnect IOF CON1, CON11, CON12, and CON40 (if anything is wired to them).
a. Is the SP Good LED illuminated?
b. Check and troubleshoot the recorded faults for hoistway access related I/O issues.
How to locate the Use the job prints or the text files.
I/O of Interest 1. Use the System Port Assignment from the text file or Port/Bit location from job prints.
2. Access Quick Commands > Show I/O? to monitor the I/O.
(Block Select Real Time Motion > ENTER > ENTER > Show I/O?).
3. Press UP or DOWN to select the port of interest. The display will show two ports at the same
time. Each row will show: Bit Assignment #, Assigned I/O name followed by the present
state of all eight bits for the port. The bit order is 1-8, left to right on the display.
Row 1: 1 INCN 01000101
Row 2: 1 BYCST 00000000
• This I/O display is in metered logic.
• This I/O display is "live" and changes when the input changes.
4. Press ENTER to cycle through each bit's I/O name.
5. Press UP or DN to scroll to different ports.
6. Press ESC to exit Quick Commands.

Troubleshooting Guide Troubleshooting Section
Problem and
Possible Solutions
Possible Causes (cont.)
The CAN node failed 1. Verify the node LEDs: PWR is ON steady, and STAT is flashing slow.
verification. Most likely 2. Verify the jumper positions. See CAN Node Address Assignment on page 4-4.
the "In Mask" or "Call • If the address jumpers are correct, see Configure the CAN Nodes on page 4-4.
Mask" has an error JP14 = position 1-2.
caused by unstable JP8 = OFF.
communications during • If jumpers were corrected, press RST.
the configure process. 3. Verify that CE MicroComm Card (THY-02) SW1 position 3, is in the ON position.
4. With power removed from the controller, verify 60 ohms +/-3 ohms between CCH/CCL. See
the CAN Channel Troubleshooting Guide (if needed).
5. Use the DCN command to ensure that the associated node reports as online
6. Issue a TECCR Command (Block Select Startup Wizard > Clear CN Config).
7. Issue a TECC Command (Block Select Startup Wizard > Config CN).
Jack will not resync 1. Verify if BLO is populated in the I/O map, port 8 bit 2. If not, contact ITS Field Engineering.
2. The following are also required for jobs which have a bottom final limit: BLOM and CHKBLO
inputs and a BLO relay.
3. Issue a WJR Command. See when and why the last resync happened.
4. Issue a FJR Command. The car should immediately perform a jack resync.
5. To change the frequency of jack resync, check and adjust the following parameters: O29,
O30, O31, O32, and O44.
Hoistway access not Hoistway Access inputs are not checked for conflicts until Hoistway Access is enabled.
functioning 1. Verify these adjustments are set per job conditions: Z38, Z39, O21, O11, and O22.
2. Use job prints to troubleshoot hardware/wiring issues related to Hoistway Access switches.
SP/NP/PLD not online 1. Disconnect all CAN channels from the IOF Card.
2. Use VER or Status to check reported software versions for each processor.
3. If still v0r0, then if all are v0r0, replace the CPU.
4. If any one processor (SP/NP/PLD) reports a version/revision, replace the IOF Card.
Controller stuck on The IOF has two inputs, and both inputs have to indicate that Normal Power or Emergency
Emergency Power Power Operation are activated.
Operation IOF CON18, pin 1 has 120 VAC for normal power.
IOE CON39, pin 6 has zero VDC for normal power.
• Connection issue between trades and CON39 of IOF Card.
• Bad generator contact for EPNP.
• If voltages are correct at the IOF Car, a failed IOF Card.

CE MicroComm Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Solutions

• NC Displays. • Verify that the CAN resistive loading equals 60 ohms.
• No LEDs active. • Set O43=9.
• Card not active when • Startup Wizard > Write to Flash.
power is applied. • Cycle power to the controller.
The PIs should display the information shown on the THY02 Card display. If not, verify all
wiring for the PIs, start at the THY02 MicroComm and work out.
Check the power supply on the following; Observe proper polarity.
• THY02 Card:
+VDC (P24), COM (G24)
• PI Connectors:
MicroComm1 is CEPI1 = COM (G24).
MicroComm2 is CEPI2 = +VDC (24VDC).
MicroComm3 is CEPI3 = DATA.
PIs Do Not Display • Place THY02 Card SW1-1 in the ON position.
• THY02 Card and all PIs should scroll through the test output from the THY02 Card.
The PIs fail to display due to a wiring issue, the PIs are the wrong type, or the PIs are not
MicroComm.
TROUBLESHOOTING
If the THY02 Card fails to display and the PIs fail to display the test sequence, the
THY02 Card is most likely the issue.
If PIs have power when the controller's disconnect is turned OFF:
• The CE MicroComm Card and Hoistway Access switches are fed 24VDC from F-P24HF
for grouped controllers having CE PIs.
• Open the fuse holder F-P24HF to remove 24VDC from the PIs and HA switches.
1 (COM) 1 (COM) 1 (COM)

2 (VIN)
Hoistway
2 (VIN) 2 (VIN)
3 (DATA) 3 (DATA) 3 (DATA) Wiring
CEPI CEPI CEPI
CE PI Wiring Example Hall PI Cards
TSP TSP
CAN High CCH BLUE CCH BLUE CANH RED CEPI1
1
CAN Low CCL WHT CCL WHT CANL BLUE CEPI2

2
SHCC SHLD SHCC SHLD COM BLK CEPI3

3
JP6 JP2
CON2 Rail Rail
CPUC Term
MICROCOMM
OUT Term
THY-02
IOF
Controller
Traveling
1 (COM)
Cable
2 (VIN)
3 (DATA)
CEPI
Car PI Card

Troubleshooting Guide Troubleshooting Section
Motor Data for Siemens Electronic Starter

Overload Overload Overload Overload
Motor Motor Nameplt Wiring Motor Motor Nameplt Wiring
Current Current Current Current
HP Voltage Amps Config. HP Voltage Amps Config.
Setting Range Setting Range
200V/208V 17.5 LINE 17.5 13-27 200V/208V 92 LINE 92 67-135
220V 15.9 LINE 15.9 13-27 220V 84 LINE 84 67-135
230V 15.2 LINE 15.2 13-27 230V 80 LINE 80 67-135
5 380V 9.2 LINE 9.2 9-18 30 380V 48 LINE 48 45-90
415V 8.4 LINE 8.4 9-18 415V 44 LINE 44 45-90
460V 7.6 LINE 7.6 9-18 460V 40 LINE 40 30-60
575V 6.1 LINE 6.1 5-10 575V 32 LINE 32 30-60
200V/208V 25 LINE 25 20-40 200V/208V 120 PHASE 120 67-135
220V 23 LINE 23 20-40 220V 109 PHASE 109 45-90
230V 22 LINE 22 20-40 230V 104 PHASE 104 45-90
7.5 380V 13 LINE 13 13-27 40 380V 63 LINE 63 67-135
415V 12 LINE 12 9-18 415V 57 LINE 57 45-90
460V 11 LINE 11 9-18 460V 52 LINE 52 45-90
575V 9 LINE 9 9-18 575V 41 LINE 41 30-60
200V/208V 32 LINE 32 30-60 200V/208V 150 PHASE 150 67-135
220V 29 LINE 29 22-45 220V 136 PHASE 136 67-135
230V 28 LINE 28 22-45 230V 130 PHASE 130 67-135
10 380V 17 LINE 17 13-27 50 380V 79 LINE 79 67-135
415V 15 LINE 15 13-27 415V 72 LINE 72 67-135
460V 14 LINE 14 13-27 460V 65 LINE 65 67-135
575V 11 LINE 11 9-18 575V 52 LINE 52 45-90
200V/208V 48 LINE 48 45-90 200V/208V 177 PHASE 177 90-180
220V 44 LINE 44 45-90 220V 161 PHASE 161 67-135
230V 42 LINE 42 45-90 230V 154 PHASE 154 67-135
15 380V 25 LINE 25 20-40 60 380V 93 LINE 93 67-135
415V 23 LINE 23 20-40 415V 85 LINE 85 67-135
460V 21 LINE 21 20-40 460V 77 LINE 77 67-135
575V 17 LINE 17 13-27 575V 62 LINE 62 45-90
200V/208V 62 LINE 62 45-90 200V/208V 221 LINE 221 90-180
220V 56 LINE 56 45-90 220V 201 LINE 201 90-180
230V 54 LINE 54 45-90 230V 192 LINE 192 90-180
20 380V 33 LINE 33 30-60 75 380V 116 LINE 116 67-135
415V 30 LINE 30 22-45 415V 106 LINE 106 45-90
460V 27 LINE 27 20-40 460V 96 LINE 96 45-90
575V 22 LINE 22 20-40 575V 77 LINE 77 67-135
200V/208V 78 LINE 78 67-135
220V 71 LINE 71 67-135
230V 68 LINE 68 67-135
25 380V 41 LINE 41 30-60
415V 37 LINE 37 30-60
460V 34 LINE 34 30-60
575V 27 LINE 27 20-40

Transformer Configuration Data
Primary Secondary
Print No. Voltage Connections Configuration Voltage Connections Configuration
874DA1 208 H1 & H2 None 120 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
240 H1 & H4 H1 – H3, H2 – H4
874DA2 120 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
480 H1 & H4 H2 – H3
874DA3* 240 H1 & H4 H1 – H3, H2 – H4 120 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
380 H1 & H2
874DA4* None 120 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
400 H1 & H3
416 H1 & H4
874DA5 None 120 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
600 H1 & H2
200 H1 & H2
874DA6** None 120 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
220 H1 & H3
874DB1 208 H1 & H2 None 120 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
240 H1 & H4 H1 – H3, H2 – H4 120 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
874DB2
480 H1 & H4 H2 – H3 120 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
TROUBLESHOOTING
874DB3 600 H1 & H2 None 120 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
200 H1 & H2
874DC1* None 120 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
220 H1 & H3
380 H1 & H2
874DC3* 400 H1 & H3 None 120 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
415 H1 & H4
208 H1 & H2
874DJ1* 208 H2 & H3 None 120/240 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
575 H1 & H4
380 H1 & H2
874DJ2* 400 H3 & H4 None 120/240 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
415 H1 & H4
240 H1 & H4
H1 – H3, H2 – H4 X1—X3, X2—X4
874DJ4* 400 H1 & H4 120/240 X1 – X4
H2 – H3 X2 – X3
480 H1 & H4
230 H1 & H4 H1 – H3, H2 – H4
874DK1 120 X1 – X2 None
460 H1 & H4 H2 – H3
230 H1 & H4 H1 – H3, H2 – H4
874DL1 120 X1 – X2 None
460 H1 & H4 H2 – H3
874DL2* 208 H1 & H2 None 120 X1 – X3 None
874DL3* 575 H1 & H4 None 120 X1 – X4 None
874DP1 208 H4 & H4 None 120/240 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
200 H1 & H2
874DW1 None 120 X1 – X4 X1—X3, X2—X4
220 H1 & H3
* Used for 50 Hz AND 60 Hz applications.
** Used ONLY for 50 Hz applications.

On-Card Diagnostics Troubleshooting Section
On-Card Diagnostics
IOF Card (6300AHV001)
NPGOOD PLDGOOD
SPGOOD PLDBAD CPUC Card
JP2 NPBAD JP3 See page 4-24
SPBAD
RSTSP
RSTNP
CLR_FLT
SAFSP
SAFCPU
SAFE
NTSNP
TSRCPU
DOORS
MCC1
MCC2
UFS
USS
DFS
DSS
Controller
Inspection
Hoistway
Door
Bypass
Door
Disconnect
CON47
CON9A CON46 RUN AC P24 P24GS P24G Car
STOP Door
Bypass

Troubleshooting Section IOF Card (6300AHV001)
IOF - LED Definitions

Desired
LED Color Definition
Status
NPBAD Red OFF ON if the NTSD processor has detected a system critical fault.
NPGOOD* Green ON ON if the NTSD processor is running with no faults.
SPBAD Red OFF ON if the safety processor has detected a system critical fault.
SPGOOD* Green ON ON if the safety processor is running with no faults.
PLDBAD Red OFF ON if the PLD has detected a fault.
PLDGOOD Green ON ON if the PLD is running with no faults.
AC Green ON ON if 120VAC present at CON18, relay EPEN energized, and fuses F-EP and F-PS are good.
All hoistway and car doors are closed,
or
Open doors are being bypassed due to a car in the door zone, HWAS Operation, or door
ON bypass switch use,
or
Car doors are open and the end of a run check is active (typically not viewable LED activity
due to the speed of that check)
DOORS Green
One or more hoistway and/or car doors are open,
or
Open doors are not being bypassed by the car being in the door zone, HWAS Operation, or
TROUBLESHOOTING
OFF door bypass switch use,
or
Car doors are open and the end of a run check is not active (typically not viewable LED
activity due to the speed of that check)
P24 Green ON ON if 24VDC is present at CON20 and fuse F-P24 is good.
ON if 24VDC is present at CON20 and fuses F-P24GS and F-P24G are good (or if 24VDC is
P24G Green ON
fed by another powered-up car in the group via CON21 cross-connections).
P24GS Green N/A Not used.
DFS Green ~ ON if the system is trying to energize the DOWN FAST valve solenoid.
DSS Green ~ ON if the system is trying to energize the DOWN SLOW valve solenoid.
UFS Green ~ ON if the system is trying to energize the UP FAST valve solenoid.
USS Green ~ ON if the system is trying to energize the UP SLOW valve solenoid.
MCC1 Green ON ON if the system is trying to start the pump motor (contactor or electronic starting).
ON if the system is trying to start the pump motor (contactor starting) or provide power to
MCC2 Green ~
the starter (electronic starter).
ON if the CPUC is allowing a complete safety string (SAFCPU output commanded ON). OFF
SAFCPU Green ON
when the CPUC has opened the safety string (SAFCPU output commanded OFF).
ON if safety processor is allowing a complete safety string (SAFSP output commanded ON).
SAFSP Green ON OFF when the safety processor has opened the safety string (SAFSP output commanded
OFF).
SAFE Green ON ON if 120VAC from a complete safety string is present at terminal 131 as seen by the CPUC.
ON if the NTSD processor is allowing a high speed run (NTSNP output commanded ON).
NTSNP Green ON OFF when the NTSD processor is forcing the FAST solenoids off when the selector encoun-
ters a terminal slowdown magnet (NTSNP output commanded OFF).
ON if the CPUC is allowing car movement in a terminal zone (TSRCPU output commanded
ON). OFF when the CPUC is forcing all valve solenoids off when the selector encounters a
TSRCPU Green ON
terminal slowdown magnet and other terminal speed reduction efforts have failed to slow
down the car (NTSNP output commanded OFF).
*Certain system conditions will let the SP or NP open the safety string, have SPGOOD/NPGOOD LEDs illuminated, and have
no faults. Example: Interlock Open (IT,IF, IR, IB, CT, CB, CF, or CR).

IOF Card (6300AHV001) Troubleshooting Section
IOF - Shunt Jumper Definitions/Settings

Name Purpose Position and Function
1-2: Programming Mode (PLD will open safety string).
JP2 Configure Safety Processor
2-3: Normal Operation (default)
1-2: Programming Mode (PLD will open safety string).
JP3 Configure NTSD Processor
2-3: Normal Operation (default)
IOF - CON Jumper Definitions/Settings

Name Purpose Position and Function
1-2: Jumps out SAFSP.
CON47 Jump out SAFSP and/or SAFCPU
2-3: Jumps out SAFCPU.
1-2: Jumps out NTSNP.
CON46 Jump out NTSNP and/or TSRCPU
2-3: Jumps out TSRCPU.
1-2: Allows a complete safety string to the motor and valve when the runbug
CON9A Temporary Runbug Operation
has been removed from CON9.
IOF - Push Buttons and Switches

Name Type Function
RSTSP Pushbutton Reset Safety Processor (SP).
RSTNP Pushbutton Reset NTSD Processor (NP).
CLR_FLT Pushbutton Clear Latched PLD Faults.
RUN Slide Run/Stop - Closes/Opens safety string.
HOISTWAY DOOR BYPASS Slide Requests Hoistway Door Bypass ON or OFF.
CAR DOOR BYPASS Slide Requests Car Door Bypass ON or OFF.
DOOR DISCONNECT Slide Requests Door Disconnect ON or OFF.
INCN Slide Requests Controller Inspection ON or OFF.
UP Pushbutton Requests movement in UP direction when INCN is ON and ENABLE is pressed.
ENABLE Pushbutton Enables UP/DOWN when INCN is ON.
DOWN Pushbutton Requests movement in DOWN direction when INCN is ON & ENABLE is pressed.
IOF Fuses
Current
Fuse Function
Rating
F-EP 0.5AFeeds 120VAC to the EPEN relay coil.
F-PS 3.0AFeeds 120VAC to the controller power supplies.
F-AC1A 6.0AFeeds 120VAC to the car, including door operators and car DC power supply.
F-AC1B 0.5AFeeds 120VAC to the hoistway door interlock circuits.
F-AC1SC 3.0AFeeds 120VAC to the safety circuit, including Triac outputs.
F-P24 4.0AFeeds 24VDC lower voltage supplies and all 24V I/O in the controller.
Feeds 24VDC to the hall risers wired to this controller.
F-P24G Variable
Variable based on power requirements of risers connected to this controller.
F-P24GS N/A Not Used.
Feeds 120VAC from the T1 transformer X1 tap (CON16-1) to the source voltage for the EPEN relay
F-AC1 Variable
and contacts (CON18-1) to feed the system AC power (does not fuse UPS output).
F-P24L 1.0A Feeds 24VDC to the CPUC Card.

IOF Connectors/Wiring
SHIELD
SHCC1 SHIELD
To SHCC1
WHT/BLUE SHT/BLUE
Lobby HC1L CON1 HC1L
Panel BLUE/WHT BLUE/WHT
HC1H HC1H
YELLOW To Top HN
CON11 TCH2 Rear Riser
WHT/RED Cross Connect
All Via G24
CE PI (THY02) RED
Rail CON2 P24G
Terminal CNA Cards
SHIELD
SHCC1
P24XC
YEL TOP-SHLD
HC1H
SHCC
SHRC
HC1L
WHT/BLUE
RCH
G24
RCL
SHCC HC1L
YEL TP-WHT BLUE/WHT
CCL HC1H
CON3
YEL TP-RED CCH YELLOW To Top HN
CON40
CON12 TCH2 Front Riser
YEL (8) G24 WHT/RED
G24
YEL (7) RED
204 P24G
YEL (6) AC1B
TRAV 202 HWA Bottom Door
YEL (5) Closed Contact
Cable
TROUBLESHOOTING
121 3H2
YEL (4) CON4 AC1B
CST HWA Top Door Freight Door
YEL (3) Closed Contact Application Only
115 3H5
CON13
YEL (2) AC1B
AC2 Non-HWA Front Door
Closed Contacts
YEL (1) 316
AC1A
BLK AC1B
AC1B Non-HWA Rear Door
HWA Bottom * Closed Contacts
Interlock WHT/BLK 326
2H2
BLK G24
HWA Top * AC1B
WHT/BLK P24
Interlock
2H5 TPSL
TAN CON5
AC1B TPDL CON14
Non-HWA Front*
Interlocks WHT/TAN G24
216 P24
GRAY
AC1B TPSR
Non-HWA Rear*
Interlocks WHT/GRAY TPDR
226
MR Safety * 102
Circuit (opt.)
107 CON6 Runbug Remove With Runbug
BLUE
HWY Safety
107
Circuit WHT/BLUE CON9A
115
*Closed and Locked Switch/Switch String Inputs CON9

CPUC Card (6300AHT001)
CON7 BOOTEN CON6 LNK CON5 CON4 BOOT CON1

CON8 JP6 RX JP1
TX
RSTDSP Test Pads

RST UDL GND WD CHKSTOP
USBD STAT
CON11 P3.3
P1.5
P5

CPUC - LED Definitions

LED LED Name Color LED Flash Rate LED Function
ON
OFF
LED is OFF in Normal Mode.
0 sec. 1 sec. 2 sec.
ON
OFF
STAT CPU Status Red
LED flashes continuously at 100ms
0 sec. 1 sec. 2 sec. rate if no job file is loaded to flash or
ON
a bad reload of data to flash has
OFF occurred.
ON LED flashes at 300ms for 3 intervals

OFF
WD Watchdog Green if upload successful, then CPU
0 sec. 1 sec. 2 sec. reboots and LED turns ON.
LED is ON if power is good, card is
~
TROUBLESHOOTING
LNK Ethernet Link Green not in reset, FPGA is configured, and
Watchdog has not timed out.
RX Ethernet Receive Green Varies depending on activity Ethernet Status - Link Good
LED flashes while Ethernet Link is
TX Ethernet Transmit Green Varies depending on activity
receiving.
LED flashes during activity on the
USBD USB Device Green Varies depending on activity
USB device port.
CHKSTOP ~ Green Varies depending on activity Manufacturing use.
CPUC - Connectors
Connector Name Function
CON1 IOF InterfaceInterface connector to IOF Card
CON4 485 Currently not used
Standard RJ45 connector and MDI pin out, used for Inter-Group communication instead
CON5 Ethernet
of CAN (RCH/RCL)
CON6 USB Host Standard USB Type A connector, used for loading software to the CPUC Card
CON7 UIT User Interface Tool connector
CON8 USB Device Standard USB Type B connector, used for connecting Owner’s IMS via a PC’s USB port
CON11 RS232 D-Shell Standard RS232 9 pin D-Shell for connecting Owner’s IMS via a PC’s serial port

CPUC Shunt Jumper Definitions and Settings

Name Status Function
On Car CAN channel split capacitor enabled.
CCC
Off Car CAN channel split capacitor disabled.
On Car CAN channel loading resistors enabled.
CCT
Off Car CAN channel loading resistors disabled.
On Hoistway CAN channel split capacitor enabled.
HC1C
Off Hoistway CAN channel split capacitor disabled.
On Hoistway CAN channel loading resistors enabled.
HC1T
Off Hoistway CAN channel loading resistors disabled.
On Intra-Group CAN channel split capacitor enabled.
RCC
Off Intra-Group CAN channel split capacitor disabled.
On Intra-Group CAN channel loading resistors enabled.
RCT
Off Intra-Group CAN channel loading resistors disabled.
1-2 Boot High, Recover Operation.
BOOT (JP1)
2-3 Boot Low, Normal Operation.
If termination is required on any CAN channels, both loading resistor and split capacitor jumpers are to be ON for
termination to function properly. If no termination is required, then both jumpers must be removed.
CPUC Power Supply Tolerances CPUC Switch Functions

Supply Name Minimum Voltage Maximum Voltage Name Function
P5 4.85VDC 5.25VDC RST Resets the CPU on the CPUC Card.
P3.3 3.20VDC 3.46VDC UDL Used to put CPU in Upload Operation.
P1.5 1.48VDC 1.57VDC
CAN Node - LED Definitions

LED Description Color LED State (1=ON, 0=OFF) Condition Status
Repeated CAN Communication

Start-up
Not Yet Established
Repeated Software Running

STAT Status Green —
Properly
0 sec. 3.5 sec. 7 sec.
Repeated CAN Communication

—
Error
Continuous ON 5V Supply Operational

PWR Power Green Anytime
Continuous OFF Bad Fuse/Connection

CAN Node Jumpers
CAN Card Node Addressing CAN Auxiliary Jumper Settings

JP7 JP6 JP5 JP4 Jumper Position Default Description
ON Enables on-card port SPI I/O.
CAN Card 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF As
JP9 Disables on-card port SPI I/O.
CAN Card 1 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF appropriate
Off-card SPI I/O only.
CAN Card 2 OFF OFF ON OFF
Not
CAN Card 3 OFF OFF ON ON JP10 1 to 2 Provisional programming jumper.
Jumped
CAN Card 4 OFF ON OFF OFF Connects the CAN communication shield
1 to 2
CAN Card 5 OFF ON OFF ON JP11 Not wiring to digital ground reference.
CAN Card 6 OFF ON ON OFF and JP15 Jumped Connects the CAN communication shield
2 to 3
CAN Card 7 OFF ON ON ON wiring to chassis ground reference.
CAN Card 8 ON OFF OFF OFF Connects the CAN communication shield
1 to 2
Not wiring bypassing split capacitor.
CAN Card 9 ON OFF OFF ON JP12
Jumped Connects the CAN communication shield
CAN Card 10 ON OFF ON OFF 2 to 3
wiring to split capacitor.
CAN Card 11 ON OFF ON ON Connects the CAN communication split
1 to 2
Not capacitor to digital ground reference.
JP13
Jumped Connects the CAN communication split
2 to 3
capacitor to chassis ground reference.
TROUBLESHOOTING
CAN Card Node (Channel 3) 1 to 2 Normal operation.
Group Addressing JP14 1 to 2
2 to 3 Programming uploading software.
Note: This data not currently used.
JP3 JP2 JP1 JP8
CAR 1 OFF OFF OFF ON
CAR 2 OFF OFF ON ON
CAR 3 OFF ON OFF ON
CAR 4 OFF ON ON ON
CAR 5 ON OFF OFF ON
CAR 6 ON OFF ON ON
CAR 7 ON ON OFF ON
CAR 8 ON ON ON ON
COMMON CAN* OFF OFF OFF OFF
*These jumpers should remain OFF for
typical CAN applications.
CAN 485 Serial PI On Board XIN XOUT

Communication I/O Port

CAN Jumpers
(continued)
485 Serial PI
P24/G24 Input
CAN Communication
P24/G24 Fused Output
CNA Card (6300AAW)
LHV Jumpers
Signal Common Connect Input Connect

INPUT
Connection Connection Common To Bus Input To Output
Port Bit CON Pin CON Pin Jumper Jumper
1 1 1 JP3-A JP1-A I/O#1
2 3 3 JP3-C JP1-B I/O#2
5 6
3 5 5 JP3-E JP1-C I/O#3
4 7 7 JP3-G JP1-D I/O#4
1
5 1 1 JP4-A JP2-E I/O#5
6 3 4 3 JP4-C JP2-F I/O#6
3
7 5 5 JP4-E JP2-G I/O#7
8 7 7 JP4-G JP2-H I/O#8
Signal Common Connect Input

OUTPUT Connection Connection Common To Bus
Port Bit CON Pin CON Pin Jumper
1 2 2 JP3-B
2 4 4 JP3-D
5 6
3 6 6 JP3-F
4 8 8 JP3-H
2
5 2 2 JP4-B
6 4 4 JP4-D
3 4
7 6 6 JP4-F
8 8 8 JP4-H

L24/LHV/S24-1/S24-2 Cards
LHV Card L24 Card

6300PR 6300LL4
IN
OUT
K8 = Output #8
K7 = Output #7 CON1 CON2 Pin 1-8 = I/O 1-8
Pin 9 = G24
K6 = Output #6 Pin 10 = P24
K5 = Output #5
CON3
K4 = Output #4 (On-Card I/O Port)
K3 = Output #3
K2 = Output #2
K1 = Output #1
TROUBLESHOOTING
S24-1 Card S24-2 Card
6300VC1 6300VL1
CON2 CON1 CON2 CON1
OUT Port IN Port OUT Port IN Port
Pin 1 = P24
24VDC CON3B
Pin 2 = I/O
POWER Pin 1 = I/O5
Pin 3 = CCIE
CON11 & LED1 Pin 2 = I/O6
Pin 4 = G24
CON12 Pin 3 = I/O7
CCIE Cross
Connections Pin 4 = I/O8
CON3 - CON3 Pin 5 = P24
CON10 Pin 1 = I/O1
Pin 2 = I/O2 CON3A
Pin 3 = I/O3 Pin 1 = I/O1
24VDC POWER LED Pin 6 = I/O6 Pin 4 = I/O4
Pin 7 = I/O7 Pin 5 = P24
Pin 8 = I/O8

CAN Selector LEDs
TSMC Card (6300ACK)

For LED details, see Table 4.
LED Color Normal Operation Fault Operation

1 Red OFF Blinks 1/4 second ON, 1/4 second OFF
Blinks 1 second ON, 1 second
2 Green
OFF Displays fault code 1 or 2
3 Green Not used, should be OFF
Status of encoder phase A,
4 Green Fault Code 2, ON Solid
ENCA
Status of encoder phase B,
5 Green Fault Code 1, ON Solid
ENCB
Fault
Codes Description Definition Causes
A mismatch between what the
TSMC Main Card internal firmware expects for
1 Problem on the TSMC Card or in the firmware.
ID Error TSMC Card ID Code and what is
detected on the board.
A mismatch between what the • The TSAC not connected to the TSMC; TSAC upside down.
TSAC Aux. Card internal firmware expects for the • Problem with the ID code on the TSAC.
2
ID Error TSAC Card ID code and what is • Problem with the firmware or TSMC circuity.
detected on the board. • Incorrect auxiliary card.
Note: The IR LEDs of the encoder are disabled.
Table 4 - CAN Selector LEDs
CAN Selector Fuses

Fuse Current Rating Function
F1 1.0A Feeds P24 from Selector CAT5 cable to 5.0VDC (P5) & 3.3VDC (P3.3) on-board power supplies.

ARM Processor Status LEDs
STAT_UPB - Status LED for the UPB ARM

Under normal operation, the processor blinks
ON and OFF (4 sec. ON, 4 sec. OFF). If the
CAN Bus communication is lost, the LED
blinks faster.
STAT_UPA - Status LED for the UPA ARM

Under normal operation, the processor
blinks ON and OFF (4 sec. ON, 4 sec. OFF).
If the CAN bus communication is lost, the
LED blinks faster.
TROUBLESHOOTING

This page
intentionally
left blank.

SERVICE INFORMATION SECTION
SERVICE INFORMATION SECTION
Service Section Contents
Contents
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Controller Assembly (2102BB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Power Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Controller Assembly (2102BB) - Replacement Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Freight Door Cabinet Assembly (2104AF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Manual Freight Door Cabinet Assembly (2104BL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Fire Service Cabinet (2104AE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Selector Assembly (2105AG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Replacement Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Cards and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Replacement Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Controller User Interface Tool (UIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Primary Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Access the UIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
UIT Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
CAN Node Configuration via the Startup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
CAN Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Command Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Card Changing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Door Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
CAN Node Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
L24, S24-1, S24-2, LHV, LHV 4x4 Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
TSMC/TSAC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
IOF Card Changing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
CPU Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Software Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Software Version Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
How to Format a USB Flash Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
USB Flash Drive Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Backup the Job Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Upload Software to CPU Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Upload Software Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Software Updates to Safety Node Devices over CAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Configure the Safety Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Contents Service Section
This page
intentionally
left blank.

Service Information Section Replacement Parts
Replacement Parts
Controller Assembly (2102BB)
DPIA Card
Power Panel
Transformer
Starter
SERVICE INFORMATION
Contactor
UPS Power Supply

Replacement Parts Service Information Section
Power Panels
Electric Motor Starter Din Rail with Ethernet Switch
Terminal Block
CE PI Micro
Comm Card
Transformer
IOD Card
Starter
3 Pole
Contactor
Din Rail with Ethernet Switch

IEC Contactor Terminal Block
CE PI Micro
Comm Card
Transformer
IOD Card
IEC Contactor
Relay
©Vertical Express 5-4 Printed in USA November 2019

Power Panels
(continued)
Single Phase
Din Rail with Ethernet Switch
Terminal Block
CE PI Micro
Comm Card
Transformer
IOF Card
IEC Contactor
Capacitor
Motor
Starter
Relay
SERVICE INFORMATION

Controller Assembly (2102BB) - Replacement Parts List

For Replacement Cards, see Cards and Fuses on page 5-14.
Item Print No. Description

298BB1 Relay Contactor, 3NO/1NC, 24VDC
298AH49 3 Pole IEC Contactor, 78A
Contactor
298AR101 IEC Contactor
298AR104 IEC Contactor
787AF1 Electronic Starter, 200-460V, 22A
787AF10 Electronic Starter, 575V, 157A
Starter
238CF2 Single Phase Capacitor, 60Uf
Misc.
370AJ13 P24GS Module
412BC1 Fuseblock DIN Rail, 1 Pole, 1/4" x 11/4"
412BD1 Fuseblock DIN Rail, End Plate
412BE2 Fuseblock DIN Rail, 600V, 30A, 2 Pole
412BE3 Fuseblock DIN Rail, 600V, 30A, 23 Pole
409BP20 Fuse Panel, FNQ, 600V, 3A
Fuseblock/
Fuse Panel
409CR200 Fuse, 600V, 0.2A
409BR5 Fuse Panel, MDA, 1A

Item Print No. Description (cont.)

690BB10 Overload Relay, Curovl Series, 5.5-21A
690BB11 Overload Relay, Curovl Series, 22-39A
690BB12 Overload Relay, Curovl Series 48, 40-51A
558AX2 Ejector Relay
770BK2 Rail Mount Socket Relay, DPDT
Relays 690CA3 DPDT PCB Relay, 6A, 24VDC
690CA5 DPDT PCB Relay, 6A, 110VDC
690CJ1 DPDT RT Series Relay, 115VAC
200ALN1 Michigan 2000 Fire Service Kit
804BC2 Socket Relay Suppressor, Diode DC
804BF1 Relay Contactor Suppressor, Diode DC
690AJ8 Reverse Phase Relay, 208-480VAC
690AJ7 Reverse Phase Relay, 575VAC
672BW1 Power Supply, 24VDC, 50W
Power 672BX1 Power Supply, 24VDC, 100W
Supply 672BY1 Power Supply, 24VDC, 150W
672AY3 Power Supply, UPS, 115VAC, 60Hz, 500VA, 300W
834CC9 Terminal Block Rail, 180°, Gray
834AN7 Terminal Block Panel, 5/16"
834CF11 Terminal Block Rail, End Plate, Black
Terminal 834CG1 Terminal Block DIN Rail, End Bracket
Block 834DF1 Terminal Block Rail, 10mm, Green/Yellow with Ground
834CX1 Terminal Block Rail Partition, Gray
834DH1 Terminal Block Rail, 16mm, Green/Yellow with Ground
834AP1 Terminal Block, Ground Lug
874DA1 Transformer, PR 208V, SEC 115/115V, .5KVA, 1PH, 60Hz
874DA2 Transformer, PR 240/240V, SEC 115/115V, .5KVA, 1PH, 60Hz
874DA4 Transformer, PR 380/400/415V, SEC 115/115V, .5KVA, 1PH, 50/60Hz
SERVICE INFORMATION
874DA5 Transformer, PR 600V, SEC 115/115V, .5KVA, 1PH, 60Hz
874DA6 Transformer, PR 200/220V, SEC 115/115V, .5KVA, 1PH, 50Hz Only
Transformers
874DB1 Transformer, PR 208V, SEC 115/115V, .75KVA, 1PH, 60Hz
874DB2 Transformer, PR 240/240V, SEC 115/115V, .750KVA, 1PH, 60Hz
874DB3 Transformer, PR 600V, SEC 115/115V, .750KVA, 1PH, 60Hz
874DC1 Transformer, PR 200/220V, SEC 115/115V, .750KVA, 1PH, 50/60Hz
874DC3 Transformer, PR 380/400/415V, SEC 115/115V, .750KVA, 1PH., 50/60Hz
200BWN001 ICON32 Front Inspection Station
200BWN002 ICON32 Rear Inspection Station
Misc.
200BMR001 Selection Harness Extension
196BMK001 Bracket Assembly, MicroComm Card

Freight Door Cabinet Assembly (2104AF)
6
5
1
7
2
2
11
4
10
ITEM PRINT NO. DESCRIPTION
1 684AD14 DIN Rail, 11" Long

2 834BX1 Terminal Block, DIN Rail, 5.2mm Wide
3 834CA1 Terminal Block, DIN Rail
4 196YF1 Terminal Bracket
5 834AF2 Terminal Block, DIN Rail End Section
6 834CD1 Terminal Block, DIN Rail Partition
7 834BW1 Terminal Block, DIN Rail Clamp
8 834AN5 Terminal Block, Panel, 5/16", 5-Position
9 6300VV1 CAN Node (CN) Board
10 6300LN1 LON High Voltage I/O Board
11 786BH3 Standoff, Card, Non-Locking, 5/32" X 3/16" X 3/8" Long
12 220DK500 Cable Assembly, Modular, CAT-5 8-8, 6" Long
220DK1 Cable Assembly, Modular, CAT-5 8-8, 12" Long
13 200CCN001 CNA Freight Door Kit

Manual Freight Door Cabinet Assembly (2104BL)
15
2
3 21
5
22
23
18
20
19
7 8
SERVICE INFORMATION
(only top bracket shown)
14 9
10, 11, 12, 13

4

Manual Freight Door Cabinet Assembly (2104BL)

(continued)
1 684AD9 DIN Rail, 7 7/16" Long
2 834CG1 Terminal Block, End Bracket
3 834DE1 Terminal Block, 180°, 10 mm Beige, Single Level
4 834CC9 Terminal Block, 180°, Gray
5 834DF1 Terminal Block, 180°, 10 mm, Green/Yellow
6 834CF11 Terminal Block, End Plate, Black
7 874DA1 Transformer, XFMR, PWR, 1PH, .5 KVA, 208V
874DA5 Transformer, XFMR, PWR, 1PH, .5 KVA, 600V
874DA2 Transformer, XFMR, PWR, 1PH, .5 KVA, 240/480V
8 128073 Adjustable Resistor, 200W, 150 Ohm
9 298BB1 Mini Contactor, 3 NO, 1 NC
10 804BC2 TVS Contactor
11 770BK2 Socket Rail Relay, DPDT
12 558AX2 Lever Relay Extraction Clip
13 690CA3 Power Relay, DPDT, 6A, 24VDC
14 412BC1 Fuse Block,1 Pole, 1/4" X 1 1/4"
15 412BE3 Fuse Block, 3 Pole, 600V, 30A
16 409BR7 Fuse, MDA 2A, 250V
409BP16 Fuse, FNQ-R, 600V, 2A
17 221AB1 Push Mount Cable Tie
18 196ACD1 Resistor Bracket
19 75781 Mica Insulator Washer, 6017
20 75778 Center Washer, 6003
21 701032 FS, Nut, NHK 3/16" (#10)-24 Z
22 399AX3 FS, Washer, FWA 1/4" S (narrow)
23 101275 FS, Screw, SPTFS 3/16" (#8)-32 X 3/8" Z

Fire Service Cabinet (2104AE)
2, 3
13
4, 5, 6, 7 12
10
11
1 804BV1 TVS Assembly, MOV, 890AD1 Tubing
SERVICE INFORMATION
2 409BR7 Fuse Panel, MDA, 250V, 2A
3 412AN1 Fuse Block, 250V, 1 Position
4 804BC1 TVS RC Contactor, 110-230VAC
5 690CA3 Power Relay, DPDT, 6A, 24VDC
6 558AX2 Extraction Lever Relay
7 770BK1 Socket Relay
8 834BW1 Terminal Block, DIN Rail Clamp
9 834BX1 Terminal Block, DIN Rail, 5.2mm Wide
10 684AD10 DIN Rail, 6 3/4" Long
11 672BW1 Power Supply, 85-132VAC, 24VDC, 2.5A
12 786AX6 PCB Locking Standoff
13 834AN5 Terminal Block, Grounding, 5 Position

Selector Assembly (2105AG)
4 1
6
Tighten thumb
screws just enough
to flatten helical lock
washers on the
thumb screws.
1 6300ACK1 Tape Selector Main Sensor Board (TSMC), Canada

6300ACK2 Tape Selector Main Sensor Board (TSMC), US
2 141549 Selector Tape Guide (not shown)
3 736CE001 Selector Auxiliary Sensor Assembly, TSAC
4 320GX1 Selector Box Cover
5 900AD60 14 Gauge Green Wire Assembly
6 462VC001 Standard Selector Harness, CAN-BUS
462VC002 Extended Selector Harness, CAN-BUS
7 850PE1 Magnet Alignment Tool
8 814CH1 Floor Magnet Template

Replacement Sensors
VISCOSITY CONTROL SENSORS
844AA4 - Thermostat,
84" ± 1" "B" Over Temp [170 degree F]
"A"
844AA3 - Thermostat, Set Temp [90 degree F]
Part No. Tank Size Dim "A" Dim "B"

Low High
844AB5 60A 18" N/A 700570 - FS,
Temp Temp
844AB6 60, 75 36" 36" Nut, NMS, #6 Z
844AB7 106, 156, 180 8" 16"
JACK SENSORS
Optical Sensor Lens and Fiber (Pair) (610AM1)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Fiber Optic Optical Sensor (610AN1)
Magnetic Proximity Sensor (736BE1)

Cards and Fuses
CN Card (6300VV) CNA Card (6300AAW)
CPUC Card (6300AHT)

Cards and Fuses

(continued)
DPIA Card 6300ADF1 DIN Rail, RJ45 Shielded Jack
Breakout Card (6300AJA)
L24 Card (6300LL) LHV 4X4 Card (6300PR)
SERVICE INFORMATION
S24-1 Card (6300VC) S24-2 Card (6300VL)

Cards and Fuses

(continued)
IOF Card (6300AHV001)
F_P24GS F_10
F_AC1 F_AC1A F_P24G
F_EP F_AC1SC
F_AC1B F_PS F_P24
Print No. Description Designator

409CW3000* Fuse Panel 2AG 250V Slow 3.0A F_PS, F_P24GS, F_P24G
409CP3000 Fuse Panel 2AG 350V Fast 3.0A F_AC1SC
409AE7 Fuse PCB PICO 125V 1A F10
409AE9 Fuse PCB PICO 125V 2A F_P24
409CW500* Fuse Panel 2AG 125V Slow 0.50A F_AC1B, F_EP
409CW1000* Fuse Panel 2AG 250V Slow 1.0A F_P24GS, F_P24G
*Included in 200BVG1 IOF Fuse Kit
TSAC Card (6300ACM)

Cards and Fuses

(continued)
LHV Card (6300LN)
TSMC Card (6300ACK)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Print No. Description Designator

409AE7 PCB PICO 125V 1A F1

Cards and Fuses

(continued)
User Interface Tool

(6300PE1)
Must be ordered as an Owner's
Service Tool (OST).
Requirements when replacing an OST (Owner's Service Tool)
• Must use the specific job number when ordering a

UIT Card (6300PE1) as a replacement.
• The job specific software is provided on a USB
(518BG1) flash drive and ships with the new UIT.
• This replacement part is job specific, requiring
engineering involvement, with a scheduled delivery
time (not “on the shelf” for immediate delivery).
• After the replacement UIT and software is delivered,
the controller must be completely readjusted.
Cable Information
PIN 1
White/Green
CAT5 CABLE Green Pair 3
Selector/SPI Loop White/Orange
Blue
Ethernet Cable White/Blue Pair 1 Pair 2
Orange
White/Brown
Brown Pair 4
Top View
CAT5 CABLE
220DK_ RJ45 Connector
Side View

Replacement Part Numbers
Part No. Print No. Description

200ATR1 CNA Plug Kit
220CM1 Cable, 22 Ga., Twisted Shielded Pair
9730345 412BC1 DIN Rail Fuseblock, 1 Pole, 1/4" x 11/4"
412BD1 DIN Rail Fuseblock, End Plate
9782618 409BR5 1A MDA Fuse Panel
462FT5 Power Supply Wiring Harness, 18 Ga.
462FV2 Power Supply Wiring Harness, 20 Ga.
545AF2 2 Position Terminal Jumper
9725638 661BA3 1 x 3 Terminal Plug/M Connector, 90° 5.08mm
672BW1 Power Supply, 50W, 24VDC
9666677 834CC9 Terminal Block Rail, 180°, Gray
834CE1 Terminal Block Rail, 180°, Green/Yellow Ground
834CF11 Terminal Block Rail End Plate, Black
834CG1 Terminal Block Rail End Bracket
900DX1 18 Ga. 2-Conductor Twisted Wire Assy. (White/Black Stripe, Black)
900DX2 18 Ga. 2-Conductor Twisted Wire Assy. (White/Red Stripe, Red)
9768130 76813 Nylon Standoff
SERVICE INFORMATION

Controller User Interface Tool (UIT) Service Information Section
Controller User Interface Tool (UIT)

The User Interface Tool (UIT) is an embedded diagnostics and service tool that allows a
qualified mechanic to commission and troubleshoot an ICON32 Controller.
Vertical Express
1 2 3 4

Primary Menus
Block Select Block Select Block Select Block Select Block Select Block Select
Adjustments Real-Time Motion System Clock Startup Wizard Inspector Tests Log-Off UIT?

• Press UP or DOWN to navigate through the menu blocks.

• Press ENTER to go forward.
• Press ESC to go back.
• For a list of the submenus, see the UIT Menu Tree starting on page 5-21.
Access the UIT 1. Press ENTER.
2. Press any button while Vertical Express is displayed in the UIT window, and enter
the pin number - 1234144. See Figure 1 (above). If the wrong pin number is
entered, continue to press UP until Vertical Express appears in the window, then
enter the pin number again.
3. Navigate to the desired Block Select Menu, and press ENTER.

Service Information Section Controller User Interface Tool (UIT)
UIT Menu Tree
Vertical
Enter Pin #
Motion/Position Time hh:mm:ss Start Wizard? FLT
UP DN ESC ENTER TFR
Arbiter No
Yes SCCB
Config CNs
Reset Fault List
Logoff UIT?
Front Car Call
UP Hall Call
DN Hall Call
ENTER
ESC
Adjust Car/Group
Commands Common
Commands Upload
Commands Startup
Front Door
Rear Door
Car Information
SERVICE INFORMATION
FJR UFWSLF PRT SUC
Desination Dispatch
GET OSDMI SCF SDC
Doors (Dxx)
IOView OSDM SPC SRU
Emergency Power (Exx) STUA
IRL UDLS SRD
IRLR UDLR SSI
Fixtures (Xxx) TECC
RFL SHL
RRF PIG
SCC
Motion (Mxx) SFL
Options 2 (Zxx) SRC
Security (Sxx) TSRT
Traffic VER
WJR
WRT

CAN Node Configuration via the Startup Wizard Service Information Section
CAN Node Configuration via the Startup Wizard

The Startup Wizard will setup and configure all CAN nodes, execute a hoistway scan, and
save parameter changes.
CAN Nodes Before using the Startup Wizard, the door operator and safety system nodes must be
installed and completely wired to the cards (CNA, Selector, DPIA, CNs, etc.). When the cor-
rect termination scheme is used, CAN channels 2 (and 3 when required) should measure
60 ohms +/- 3 ohms, with power removed and all connections made.
Configure the CAN System
1. Access the UIT.
2. Access the Startup Wizard.

a. Press UP or DOWN until Block Select Startup Wizard displays, and then press
ENTER.
b. When Start Wizard? displays, press UP.
3. Issue the Teach Command.

a. When Teach Front CN? displays,
• For Front Riser - press ENTER, and press ENTER again.
• No Front Riser - press UP.
b. When Teach Rear CN? displays,

• For Rear Riser - press ENTER, and press ENTER again.
• No Rear Riser - press UP.
4. Configure the CNs.

a. When Config CN displays, press ENTER.
b. When Completed Config displays, press ENTER.
5. Skip Automatic Hoistway Scan. When Auto Hoistway Scan? displays, press UP.
6. Save the parameters.

a. When Write to Flash displays, press ENTER.
b. When Write Complete displays, press ESC.

Service Information Section CAN Node Configuration via the Startup Wizard
Command Sequence
To properly configure the CAN Nodes, issue these commands in the order written:
TECCR, TECC.
TECCR The TECCR Command resets all online CAN nodes’ configuration. See Figure 2.
TECCR -
Complete, Now must TECC
this car and car 2.
Figure 2 - TECCR Command
TECC The TECC Command configures all online CAN nodes. See Figure 3.
CAN resistive loading will affect the configuration. Before issuing a TECC Command,
check the loading for Channel 2 or Channel 3 (if used).
TECCR - Config Reset HN/CN

UP: Next DN: Prev
Figure 3 - TECC Command (appears after TECCR > ENTER)
DCN The DCN Command displays the status of all CN Cards, and has the ability to
SERVICE INFORMATION
ping specific ports to verify operation. See Figure 4 on page 5-24.
• The status of the CAN Node Cards located on either Channel 2 or Channel 3.
• Specific CN data:
– Communication status
– Node ID
– Number of ports assigned
– Specific ports assigned
Executing a DCN Command prompts the user to enter specific parameters; the
requested data appears in the UIT window. If a line is scrolling, press UP to pause
the screen, and then press UP to resume scrolling.

CAN Node Configuration via the Startup Wizard Service Information Section
Command Sequence
(continued)
DCN – Display Stats CN:n NodeName----Online:n Pcks:n Ch:n v:n uPLPC23xx SP:n TP:n
UP: Next DN: Prev Ports: n, n+1, n+2, 255, n+4
ENTER
CN: CN Node ID (selected).
NodeName : name assigned to the node selected.
Select CN Node CN Node: (0-11) ----Online: online status;
number of interest. Up: + DN: 1 = online, 0 = offline
Pcks : number of data packets received.
ENTER Ch : CAN channel node is assigned;
2 = CCH/CCL, 3 = HC1H/HC1L
v : node software version.
Ping a Port? uPLPC23xx : node hardware version.
Up: Yes DN: No No/
SP : number of Shared Ports assigned the node.
ENTER
TP : number of Total Ports assigned the node.
Ports : lists the control system port number
Yes assigned to the node’s physical I/O port. (255
indicates an unassigned port.) A node card having
CN Node previously 12 ports will have 12 ports listed, only the used
chosen is the CNn Port: (0-16) ports will have a port numbers assigned them.
UP: + DN: -
indicated (CNn).
Select the Port of CN : CN Node selected previously.
interest from Port : Port number selected previously.
chosen CN. ENTER v : node software version.
LPC23xx : node hardware version.
Bit : bit assignment.
CNn Portn v:# LPC23xx IOName : I/O name assigned to bit.
**Bit#, IOName, Data, IO, Call Data : indicates I/O state;
1- inactive, 0 - active.
IO : indicates I/O as input or output;
1 – input, 0 – output.
Call : indicates I/O as a hall/car call;
1 – call, 0 – non-call
Figure 4 - DCN Command and Menu Tree

Service Information Section Card Changing Procedures
Card Changing Procedures

Door Card See the appropriate door operator manual.
CAN Node Card 1. Remove the car from service.
3. Note the connector locations, and then remove all connectors from the old card.
4. Note the jumper positions and socketed resistor configurations, and then
remove the old card.
5. Place jumpers and resistor configurations in same positions as on the old card.
6. Install the replacement card.
7. Install all wires and connectors on the new card.
9. Log into the UIT using the PIN number (1234144).
10. Navigate to ADJUSTMENTS BLOCK > COMMANDS STARTUP.
11. Issue a TECC Command.
12. To confirm communication and port assignments, issue a DCN Command.
13. Verify proper operation, and return the car to service.
L24, S24-1, S24-2, LHV, LHV 4x4 Cards

These cards have no software and can be used where needed. Ensure that the
SERVICE INFORMATION
cables are correctly marked so they may be correctly reconnected after replacing the
suspected failed card.
1. Remove the car from service.
3. Note locations, and remove all connectors from the I/O Cards.
4. Install the replacement card.
5. Install all wires and connectors on the new card.
7. Verify proper operation, and return the car to service.

Card Changing Procedures Service Information Section
Card Changing Procedures

(continued)
TSMC/TSAC Card 1. Position the car to easily access the car top, if possible.
2. Remove the car from service.
4. Access the car top.
5. Disassemble the selector. See the Selector Assembly (2105AG) on page 5-12.
6. Replace the TSMC/TSAC Card, and reassemble the selector.
7. Restore power to the controller.
8. Log into the UIT using the PIN number (1234144).
9. Navigate to STARTUP WIZARD BLOCK.
10. Place the car on Automatic Service.
11. Activate the Door Disconnect Switch on the IOF Card.
12. Press UP until Auto Hoistway Scan? appears, and then press ENTER.
IOF Card Changing Procedure

Download Existing Files from the CPUC and Remove Old Cards
2. Insert the manufacturing-supplied USB flash drive into the USB Host Port (CON6 on
the existing CPUC Card). Most USB flash drives may be used, if they are properly for-
matted and have the correct file folder structure. See USB Flash Drive Preparation on
page 5-34.
Transferring software between the CPUC and USB flash drives requires a few
minutes to complete. Resetting the card during this time could result in corrupt-
ing the USB and the CPUC.
3. Issue a UDLS Command.This process will backup image and generic software files
from the CPUC to the USB flash drive.
Controller UIT: Block Select Adjustments > Commands Upload > UDLS.
4. Remove the USB flash drive from the CPUC.

IOF Card
(continued) 6. Disconnect CON40. This process removes the P24XC feed from other controllers
in the group. See Figure 5 on page 5-28 for the remaining steps in this section.
7. Verify that the following LEDs are not illuminated:

• P24.
• P24G.
• P24GS.
• AC (located in the bottom right half of the IOF).
8. Verify that the P24GS PSM (located on the DIN rail above the IOF) is not
illuminated.
9. Detach all connectors from the IOF and CPUC Cards.
10. Remove the CPUC Card from the plastic standoffs of the IOF Card, and
place the CPUC Card on a static-free surface.
11. Remove the IOF Card from the controller cabinet, and place the IOF Card
on a static-free surface.
Transfer and Install New Cards
1. Transfer the following items from the old card to the new card.
• Plastic Standoffs.
• CON9A.
• Jumpers JP2 and JP3 (in 2-3 positions).
• Any fuses including, but not limited to, F-AC1.
– Use the job prints to verify that all necessary fuses are populated with
the correct size and fuse type.
SERVICE INFORMATION
– F-P24GS on the IOF Card is not used, a PSM is located on the DIN rail
above the IOF Card to supply voltage.
2. Install the CPUC Card onto the IOF Card. Take care not to bend pins that join the
CPUC and the IOF Cards together. The pins are located at CON1, CPUC Card.
3. Place the combined cards in the controller cabinet.
4. Replace all connectors except CON40, CON1, CON12, and CON11 on IOF Card.
5. Where Ethernet communication is used, leave the Ethernet cable disconnected

from CON5 on the CPUC Card.
6. Verify that the controller inspection switch is in the INSP position.

IOF Card
(continued)
CON11 CON1
CON40 SPGOOD, SPBAD LEDs CON6 on the
Pins that join CPUC
CPUC Card
JP2 Jumper Card to IOF Card
CON12
JP3 Jumper
CON5
WD LED
CON9A F_AC1 Fuse AC LED

P24 Series LEDs
Figure 5 - IOF Card with CPUC Card

CPU Replacement
Back Up the Job Software
2. Insert the manufacturing-supplied USB flash drive into the USB Host Port (CON6
on the existing CPUC Card). Most USB flash drives may be used, if they are prop-
erly formatted and have the correct file folder structure. See USB Flash Drive
Preparation on page 5-34.
Transferring software between the CPUC and USB flash drives requires a
few minutes to complete. Resetting the card during this time could
result in corrupting the USB and the CPUC.
3. Issue a UDLS Command. This process will backup the generic and job
configuration files to the USB flash drive.
Controller UIT: Block Select Adjustments > Commands Upload > UDLS.
Replace the CPUC Card

2. Unplug CON40 from the IOF Card.
3. Unplug the Ethernet cable (if used) from CON5 of the CPUC Card.
4. Set jumper positions on the replacement CPUC Card to match the faulty CPUC
Card.
5. Confirm that all LEDs on the IOF Card are not illuminated.
6. Carefully uninstall the faulty CPUC Card. Take care not to bend the pins that join
the CPUC to the IOF Card, CON1 of the CPUC Card.
SERVICE INFORMATION
7. Remove the UIT and standoffs from the faulty CPUC Card.

The UIT Card is bound to the specific job configuration (software) for the job. The UIT

Card will not permit the adjustment of any other job.
During replacement:
• Do Not Swap UIT Cards between controllers/CPU Cards.
• Remove the UIT Card from the failed CPUC Card.
8. Install the UIT and standoffs on the replacement CPUC Card.
9. Carefully install the replacement CPUC Card onto the IOF Card. Before applying
pressure, ensure that CON1 of the CPUC properly aligns with the IOF Card's mat-
ing pins.

CPU Replacement
(continued)
10. For jobs where the Hall CAN channel is being used, remove CON1, CON12, and
CON11 on the IOF Card.
11. Where Ethernet communication is used, leave the Ethernet cable disconnected from
CON5 on the CPUC Card.
12. Use the USB with the job's backup files (from the UDLS earlier), and copy the backup
files into the update folder of drive. See USB Flash Drive Preparation on page 5-34.
13. Restore the mainline power.
14. Install the USB flash drive (used earlier) into CON6 on the CPUC Card.
15. Press RST on the CPUC Card.
16. Release RST.
17. Press and hold UDL until the STAT LED blinks Morse Code `Z' (two long and two short
blinks). When complete, the STAT LED blinks 3 times before CPUC Card resets itself.

If the upload takes longer than 15 minutes, or if the STAT LED blinks every 100ms contin-

uously, the upload has failed. Cycle power to the controller and then remove the USB from
the CPUC Card. See Upload Software Troubleshooting on page 5-37.
18. After the upload is successful, verify that the controller will run from Inspection Oper-
ation. Should the car fail to run, troubleshoot fault codes and I/O states to determine
the issue. See Troubleshooting I/O Issues on page 4-13.
19. Place the door disconnect switch in the Door Disconnect position.
20. Place the inspection switch in the Normal position.
21. Use Quick Commands, and issue car calls to verify Automatic Operation. This action
verifies the hoistway scan. If the car will not run on Automatic Operation, perform a
new hoistway scan.
Block Select Real Time Motion > Quick Commands > Front Car Call/Rear Car Call.
22. Reconnect CON40, CON1, CON11, and CON12 on the IOF Card.
23. Reconnect the Ethernet cable (if used) to CON5 on the CPUC Card.
24. Verify group service operation.

Service Information Section Software Management
Software Management
Software Version Confirmation
How to determine which versions of software are running in the control system which
determine how the control system functions.
1. Verify that the Controller Inspection Switch in on INSP.
2. Press any button while Vertical Express is displayed in the UIT window, and
enter the pin number - 1234144. See Figure 6.

If the wrong pin number is entered, continue to press UP until Vertical Express

appears in the display window, then enter the pin number again.

Window
1 2 3 4

3. Issue a VER Command.
SERVICE INFORMATION
a. When BLOCK SELECT ADJUSTMENTS displays, press ENTER.
BLOCK SELECT
ADJUSTMENTS
b. Press UP until ADJUST MENU COMMANDS COMMON displays.
ADJUST MENU
COMMANDS COMMON

Software Management Service Information Section

(continued)
c. Press UP until VER displays, press ENTER, and window displays this data:
Top Line JOB:xxxnnn CPUC:vxry, CPUCfpga: vxry, IOFfpga:vxry

Bottom Line SP: vxry, SP:fpga:0, NP: vxry, SELA:vx, SELB:vx, HNBTopA: vx,
HNBTopB:vx, HNBBotA:vx, HNBBotB: vx
v = version Each of the safety nodes have two safety processors. Both
x = version number processors should display the same version of software.
r = revision
y = revision number
This controller contains software that is under AECO A17.7 Control. When
replacing boards or functions involving this controlled software, verify that
the replacement or updated software is the same version listed on the
580AMY marker attached to the controller.
4. Fill out the following chart, and note the software version.
Device Definition Installed Software Version

CPUC Controller Generic
SP Safety Processor
NP Normal Processor
SELA Selector Node A
CWIL/DPIA DPIA Node A
How to Format a USB Flash Drive
A USB flash drive is used to load software files into the CPUC, DPIA, Selector, and CAN
Node cards (of all types). A manufacturing-supplied USB flash drive ships with each job.
The USB has the current version of the job configuration file software and documentation
for the job.
1. Use Windows Explorer to access the USB flash drive; the recommended USB flash
drive is part number 9811126.
2. Right-click on the drive, and select Format.
3. Determine the size of the USB flash drive, select the appropriate option from the File
System drop-down box, and click Start. See Figure 7 on page 5-33.
• If the flash drive is less than 2GB, select the FAT option.
• If the flash drive is 2GB or larger, select the FAT32 option.

How to Format a USB Flash Drive

(continued)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If USB flash drive is less than 2GB If USB flash drive is more than 2GB
Figure 7 - USB Flash Drive Windows

USB Flash Drive Preparation
Requirement: PC with an available USB port, and a USB flash drive
1. At the root of the USB flash drive, create a "tke" folder. When creating folders on the
USB flash drive, all folder names must be in lowercase for the CPU to recognize the
folder names. See Figure 8.
2. Inside the "tke" folder, create two separate folders: "update" and "backup."
3. Access the generic file (if required) and place a copy of the generic file into the
"\tke\update" folder.
4. Create a subfolder in the "\tke\backup" folder for each elevator controller being
updated/reloaded.
Helpful Tip: The "\tke\backup" location is a convenient place for quick access to files at
a later time.
5. Access the needed software, and place a copy of each elevator's configuration (.cfg)
file in the corresponding subfolder of the "backup" folder. The job configuration file
name has the elevator job number ("xxxnnn") included in it. See Table 1.
File Type CPUC

Configuration jobxxxnnn.cfg
Generic icon-cpua.v6r4D_
Table 1 - CPUC File Type
tke Folder
backup, recover, update Folders
Elevator Job Number Folders
Figure 8 - Create Folders for USB Flash Drive

USB Flash Drive Preparation

(continued)
6. Use Windows Explorer to access the job files placed in the "\tke\backup\" folder
and copy the required elevator's "jobxxnnnn.cfg" file to the "\tke\update" folder.
7. Use Windows Explorer to verify that the required software files are in the "/tke/
update" folder on the USB flash drive.

• Only one version of generic file is permitted in the folder at a time.

• If multiple job files are placed in the update folder, the STAT LED will continuously
flash every 100ms.
• If multiple generic files are present in the update folder at the time of an update,
the CPUC Card could become corrupted, requiring the Recover Utility to be used.
• The generic and configuration upload may be processed either individually
or simultaneously.
• The CPU uploads the configuration (_.cfg) file located in the "\tke\update"
folder. When the upload completes, the _.cfg file is deleted from the update
folder.
• The generic file remains in "\tke\update\" folder until manually deleted. This
is to facilitate updating generic files across a group of controllers using one
USB flash drive.
9. Remove the USB flash drive from the computer.
Backup the Job Software
2. Insert the prepared USB flash drive into the CON6 USB port on the CPUC Card.
SERVICE INFORMATION
Transferring software between the CPUC and USB flash drives requires a
few minutes to complete. Resetting the card during this time could result in
corrupting the USB and the CPUC.
3. Enter the UDLS Command to copy the "jobxxnnnn.cfg" file and generic file from
the CPUC Card to the "\tke\backup\jobnumber" folder on the USB Flash Drive.
From UIT: Block Select Adjustments > Commands Upload > UDLS.
4. Once the backup is complete, remove the USB flash drive from the CPUC, and
return the car to operation.

Upload Software to CPU Cards
Recommendations • Before starting any software updates in control system, backup the software.
• For grouped controllers: When updating the master controller, isolate it from the rest of
the group by disconnecting IOF CON40, CON1, CON11, and CON12 as well as CPUC
CON5. This action will cause the next car to take over the master controller of group
operations assignment while software is being loaded. After software is loaded and
operation is restored, restore the connectors and cable.
Uploading software to the CPU requires a few minutes to complete. Resetting the
card during this time could result in corrupting the USB flash drive and damaging
the card.
2. Insert the prepared USB flash drive into the CPUC Card, CON6 USB port.
3. Press and release RST.
4. Press and hold UDL while the CPU is rebooting.
5. Press and hold UDL until the STAT LED blinks a Morse Code `Z' (two long and two
short blinks). When the upload is complete, the STAT LED blinks 3 times before the
CPUC Card resets itself.

• If the upload takes longer than 15 minutes, or if the STAT LED blinks every 100ms

continuously, the upload has failed. Cycle power to the controller and then remove the
USB from the CPUC Card. See Upload Software Troubleshooting on page 5-37.
• If the CPU is stuck in Zmodem for longer than 15 minutes, remove power from the
card, and remove the USB flash drive.
6. After the upload is successful, issue the following commands from Block Select
Adjust > Commands Common: GET, WRT, RFL, and RRF.
7. Cycle from Inspection to Automatic and back to Inspection.
8. Cycle power.
9. Verify that the controller will run from Inspection Operation. Should the car fail to run,
troubleshoot fault codes and I/O states to determine the issue. See Troubleshooting
I/O Issues on page 4-13.
10. Place the door disconnect switch in the Door Disconnect position.
11. Place the inspection switch in the Normal position.

Upload Software to CPU Cards

(continued)
12. Use Quick Commands, and issue car calls to verify Automatic Operation. Hall
calls do not function while on Door Disconnect Operation.
Block Select Real Time Motion > Quick Commands > Front Car Call/Rear Car
Call.

If the job configuration file was a manufacturing file and not a back up copy of an

adjusted job (from the UDLS Command), perform a new hoistway scan and adjust
for the job (Fire Service, HWA, EP, security, date/time, etc.). See the Adjustment sec-
tion of this manual.
13. Place the door disconnect switch in the OFF position.
14. Verify that the car and hall buttons function correctly.
15. Return the car to service.
Upload Software Troubleshooting
1. Verify the folder structure and the file location within the folder structure. See
USB Flash Drive Preparation on page 5-34.
2. Use a different USB flash drive (recommended device: part number 9811126).
3. Copy the software files to a different USB drive.
4. Format the USB flash drive. Create a new folder structure and copy needed
file(s) into the Update folder. See How to Format a USB Flash Drive on
page 5-32.
5. If the software fails to load again, replace the CPUC Card.
SERVICE INFORMATION
Software Updates to Safety Node Devices over CAN
1. Move the needed files into the "\tke\update" directory. See Table 2 on
page 5-38 for file identification.
See also: USB Flash Drive Preparation on page 5-34.

Software Updates to Safety Node Devices over CAN

(continued)
3. Use the UIT to update the software of the Safety Processor.
a. Place JP2 on pins 1-2 beside the RSTSP.
b. Use the UIT to issue the following commands:
» UFWSPF Command: Adjustments > Commands Upload > UFWSPF.
» SPC Command: Adjustments > Commands Startup > SPC.
The UIT will display the upload progress and completion. When finished, the CPUC will
report SP Config Complete.
c. Place JP2 on pins 2-3.
d. Cycle power to the controller.
Device (via USB flash drive) Command File Name

Safety Processor UFWSPF SPH.vXrX
Normal Processor UFWNPF N/A
Table 2 - Software Update File Information
Configure the Safety Processor

1. Find the Safety Processor (SP) Programming Jumper JP2 (located on the IOF Card
next to RSTSP).
3. From the UIT, press any button while Vertical Express is displayed, and enter the
pin number - 1234144. If the wrong pin number is entered, continue to press UP
until Vertical Express appears in the window, then enter the pin number again.
4. From the UIT, access Block Select Adjustments and press ENTER.
5. Press UP or DOWN to scroll to Commands > Startup, and press ENTER.
6. Press UP or DOWN to scroll to the SPC Command, and press ENTER.

• The UIT should display SP Config Complete.
• If the SP Programming Jumper is in the wrong position or the jumper shunt is bad,
the UIT will return SP Programming Jumper Not Installed. Correct the jumper,
and press ENTER again.
8. Press RST on the CPUC. Once the controller recovers, repeat the steps to access the
Main Menu Screen.
At this point, the Safety Processor is configured and either the SP Good or the SP Bad LED
should be illuminated. The SP BAD LED will remain lit until the nodes have been taught
and configured.
Networking See Group CAN Channel Termination on page 4-9.

SERVICE REFERENCE SECTION
REFERENCE SECTION
REFERENCE SECTION
Reference Section Contents
Contents
UIT Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5R-3
Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5R-4
CNA Fixed I/O Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5R-7
ICON32 I/O Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5R-8
I-2/I-3 Valve Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5R-9
Vertical Express Product Manual 5R-1 88500 v.1.0

Contents Reference Section
This page
intentionally
left blank.
©Vertical Express 5R-2 Printed in USA April 2020

Reference Section UIT Menu Tree
UIT Menu Tree

Vertical
Enter Pin #
Motion/Position Time hh:mm:ss Start Wizard? FLT
UP DN ESC ENTER TFR
Arbiter No
Yes SCCB
Config CNs
Reset Fault List
Logoff UIT?
Front Car Call
UP Hall Call
DN Hall Call
ENTER
ESC
Adjust Car/Group
Commands Common
Commands Upload
Commands Startup
Front Door
Rear Door
Car Information
FJR UFWSLF PRT SUC
Desination Dispatch
GET OSDMI SCF SDC
Doors (Dxx)
IOView OSDM SPC SRU
Emergency Power (Exx)
REFERENCE
IRL UDLS STUA SRD
IRLR UDLR SSI
Fixtures (Xxx) TECC
RFL SHL
RRF PIG
SCC
Motion (Mxx) SFL
Options 2 (Zxx) SRC
Security (Sxx) TSRT
Traffic VER
WJR
WRT
Vertical Express Product Manual 5R - 3 88500 v.1.0

Cable Connections Reference Section
Cable Connections
FSE 18AWG FSE
Trades FSM 18AWG FSM

Trades
Access FSX 18AWG FSX Access
PNL EPNP* 18AWG EPNP* PNL
EPW* 18AWG EPW*
P24XC 18AWG P24XC

G24 18AWG G24
RCH TSP 22AWG RCH
IOF RCL TSP 22AWG RCL IOF
CON40 SHRC SHLD SHRC CON40
HC1H** TSP 22AWG HC1H**
HC1L** TSP 22AWG HC1L**
SHHC1** SHLD SHHC1**
HCIE 18AWG HCIE

FSH1 18AWG FSH1
FSH2 18AWG FSH2
CNA FSH5 18AWG FSH5 CNA
“MODCTRL_” FSH3^ 18AWG FSH3^ “MODCTRL_”
FSH4^ 18AWG FSH4^
Ux 18AWG Ux
URx 18AWG URx
Dx 18AWG Dx
DRx 18AWG DRx
Controller “N” Controller “N+1”
Notes: Third party equipment may require additional wiring not shown, see manufacturer’s document for wiring requirements.
*Not cross-connected for battery lowering option.
**Only cross-connected when CAN device is connected on CAN Channel 3.
^Only cross-connected when remote Fire Service keyswitch option is provided and I/O are present in job image.
Machine Room Cross-Connection Reference
©Vertical Express 5R - 4 Printed in USA April 2020

Reference Section Cable Connections
Cable Connections
(continued)
L10 BLK 14 AWG L10

L20 WHT 14 AWG L20
Trades GND GRN 14 AWG GND
Access
PNL TEL-R TSP 20AWG TEL-R
TEL-T TSP 20 AWG TEL-T
SHLD TEL-SHG
SHCC TSP 20AWG SHCC
IOF CCL TSP 20AWG CCL
CON3 CCH SHLD CCH
G24 18AWG (#8) G24
204 18AWG (#7) 204

202 18AWG (#6) 202 COP
121 18AWG (#5) 121 Rail Term.
IOF
CON4 CST 18AWG (#4) CST
115 18AWG (#3) 115
AC2 18AWG (#2) AC2
AC1A 18AWG (#1) AC1A
3A-2 18AWG INHA

3A-3 18AWG INHAM
4A-2 18AWG INCTM
DPIA
4A-3 18AWG INCTU
4A-4 18AWG INCTD
4A-5 18AWG INCT
CEPI1 20AWG CEPI-1

CEPI2 20AWG CEPI-2
CEPI3 20AWG CEPI-3
Controller
Rail Term. DPWR1 18AWG DPWR1
REFERENCE
Door Op.
DPWR2 18AWG DPWR2 (if req.)
DPWR3 18AWG DPWR3
Notes: Third party equipment may require additional wiring not shown, see manufacturer’s docs for wiring requirements.
AC1/AC2 from Trades Panel is for cab lighting.
AC1A/AC2 from IOF is for the elevator control system.
Traveling Cable Connections Reference

Printed in USA April 2020
Reference Section
Hoistway Connections
G24 18AWG G24 HCIE 18AWG HCIE
P24G 18AWG P24G U1 18AWG U1 Hoistway
U2 18AWG U2 Cable
P24HF 18AWG P24HF
Ux 18AWG Ux
Connections
HATU 18AWG HATU
Controller Rail Term.
Reference
Hoistway Connections
UR1 18AWG UR1
CNA Connections
HATUM 18AWG HATUM

HA Sw.
HATD 18AWG HATD Top UR2 18AWG UR2
NOTE: Any additional
HATDM 18AWG HATDM URx 18AWG URx optional I/O requires
HABU 18AWG HABU D1 18AWG D1 one wire per I/O for
D2 18AWG D2 hoistway (indicator
HABUM 18AWG HABUM HA Sw. or input).
HABD 18AWG HABD Bottom Dx 18AWG Dx
HABDM 18AWG HABDM DR1 18AWG DR1
CEPI1 20AWG MCIN-1 DR2 18AWG DR2
CE PI 18AWG
CEPI2 20AWG MCIN-2 Con. DRx DRx
CEPI3 20AWG MCIN-3
FSH1 18AWG FSH1 102
From MR Safety Devices
FSH2 18AWG FS Sw. IOF 107
FSH2 Lobby CON6
FSH5 18AWG FSH5 107
From HW Safety Devices
115
5R - 6
FSH3 18AWG FSH3 FS Sw.
Remote AC1B
CNA Connections
FSH4 18AWG FSH4 From HW Closed & LOCKED Switch –

FS1I 18AWG FS1I 2H2 (IB)
Bottom HA Landing
PIx 18AWG PIx AC1B
From HW Closed & LOCKED Switch –
HLU1 18AWG HLU1 IOF 2H5 (IT) Top HA Landing
HLU2 18AWG HLU2 CON5 AC1B
From HW Closed & LOCKED String –
HLUn 18AWG HLUn 216 (IF) Front Non-HA Landings
HLD1 18AWG HLD1 AC1B
From HW Closed & LOCKED String –
HLD2 18AWG HLD2 226 (IR) Rear Non-HA Landings
HLDn 18AWG HLDn
SOA 18AWG SOA AC1B
From Closed Switch –
FLOx 18AWG FLOx 3H2 (CB) Bottom HA Landing
CLOx 18AWG CLOx AC1B
THLK 18AWG THLK From Closed Switch –
IOF 3H5 (CT)
Cable Connections
EPJ 18AWG Top HA Landing
©Vertical Express
EPJ CON13 AC1B
TPDR 18AWG TPDR From Closed Switch String –
Connections
316 (CF) Front Non-HA Landings
TRDL 18AWG TPDL
IOF
TP*SR 18AWG TP*SR AC1B
From Closed Switch string –
TP*SL 18AWG TP*SL 326 (CR) Rear Non-HA Landings
Reference Section CNA Fixed I/O Charts
CNA Fixed I/O Charts

Notes
Con15 - CAN Channel
Con14 - 24VDC power supply
Con13 - 24VDC loads (fused)
Pin No. CON15 Pin No. CON13 Pin No. CON6 Pin No. CON5
1 SHCC 1 G24 1 1 FSH1
2 CCL 2 G24 2 2 FSH2
3 CCH 3 G24 3 3 FSH5
CON14 4 24VDC 4 4 FS1I
1 G24 5 24VDC 5 5 FSH3
2 P24G 6 24VDC 6 6 FSH4
7 7
Pin No. CON12 Pin No. CON11 8 8
1 SPAH1 1 HLUR1
2 SPAH2 2 HLUR2 Pin No. CON4 Pin No. CON3
3 SPAH3 3 HLDR2 1 DOB 1 PI4
4 SPAH4 4 HLUR3 2 DCB 2 PI5
5 SPAH5 5 HLDR3 3 DOBR 3 BUZ
6 SPAH6 6 HLUR4 4 DCBR 4 CLU
7 SPAH7 7 HLDR4 5 FSC1 5 CLD
8 SPAH8 8 HLDR5 6 FSC2 6 CLUR
7 FSRI 7 CLDR
Pin No. CON10 Pin No. CON9 8 FSCC 8 CLFS
1 UR1 1 HLD5
2 UR2 2 SOA Pin No. CON2 Pin No. CON1
3 DR2 3 ISC 1 CR1 1 CCIE
4 UR3 4 SPAL1 2 CR2 2 C1
5 DR3 5 SPAL2 3 CR3 3 C2
6 UR4 6 SPAL3 4 CR4 4 C3
7 DR4 7 SPAL4 5 CR5 5 C4
REFERENCE
8 DR5 8 SPAL5 6 PI1 6 C5
7 PI2 7 DAU
Pin No. CON8 Pin No. CON7 8 PI3 8 DAD
1 D5 1 HCIE
2 HLU1 2 U1
3 HLU2 3 U2
4 HLD2 4 D2
5 HLU3 5 U3
6 HLD3 6 D3
7 HLU4 7 U4
8 HLD4 8 D4

ICON32 I/O Chart Reference Section
ICON32 I/O Chart

I/O Number
Port #
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 INCN INCNM INCNU INCND CDBM CDBM2 HDBM HDBM2
2 BYCST BYHA BYHAR BYHAB BYHAT BYCDB BYHDB BYDZ
3 IB IT IF IR CB CT CF CR
4 SAFSPM SAFCPU SAFCPM SAFE TSRCPU CDCF CDCR CST
5 MCC1 MCC2 UFS USS DFS DSS
6 MCC1M MCC2M UFSM USSM DFSM DSSM
7 PRSW OLTS OLTO
8 CHKTSR CHKDS TSRCPM NTSNPM
9 DD
10 FSM FSX FSE FST FSSR STBC EPW EPNP
11 HATU HATUM HATD HATDM HABU HABUM HABD HABDM
12
13 FSBZ
14
15 LVU LVD DZ1 DZ2 LVUR LVDR DZ1R DZ2R
16 TSR1
17 INCTM INCTU INCTD INCTU2 INCTD2 INCT INHA INHAM
18
19 CCIE C1 C2
20
21 BUZ CLFS
22 DOB DCB FSC1 FSC2 FSRI FSCC
23 FSH1
24
25 HCIE U1 D2
26 D5 HLU1 HLD2
27 ISC
28
29
30
Ports 1-18 are IOF connections. Ports 19-30 are CNA node 0 (MODCTRL1).

Reference Section I-2/I-3 Valve Reference
I-2/I-3 Valve Reference

The Slowdown and Floor Approach Chart (below) explains the effects of slowdown point and rate adjustments on
car stabilized leveling distances. These adjustments should be referenced as needed, specifically during final
valve adjustments or subsequent service calls.
UIT: Motion Quick CMD > Stabilized Leveling Readout
Top
Speed 3"-4" of
stabilized leveling
Speed
Car
P17/P18
Selector Slowdown Point
Car Position
Level
Level
Floor
Floor
This figure shows the requirement of 3"-4" of leveling distance. If the car
slowdown and approach to the floor results in longer leveling than 3"-4",
car performance and fluid could degrade due to unnecessary fluid heating.
P17/P18
Selector Slowdown Points P17/P18 too small
Top (no leveling distance,
Speed car re-levels)
3"-4" of
Speed
stabilized leveling
Car
P17/P18
too large
(excessive leveling distance)
Level
Level
Floor
Floor
Car Position
This figure shows the effect of using the P17/P18 Adjustments to control the leveling
distance. If the car slowdown and approach to the floor is comfortable as adjusted in
the valve but results in incorrect leveling distance (3"-4"), move the P17/P18
Selector Showdown Point properly.
P17/P18
Selector Slowdown Point Valve Slowdown too soft
(no leveling distance,
REFERENCE
Top car re-levels)
Speed
3"-4" of
Speed
stabilized leveling
Car
Valve Slowdown
too aggressive
(excessive leveling distance)
Level
Floor
Level
Car Position
Floor
This figure shows the effect of using the I-2/I-3 Valve Slowdown Screw Adjustments to control
the leveling distance. If the car showdown point P17/P18 is set but leveling is incorrect (not 3"-4"),
move the Valve Slowdown Screw.
• UP SLDN Screw: IN = Shorter leveling distance, increased leveling speed, softer feel to slowdown.
• DOWN SLDN Screw: OUT = Shorter leveling distance (with full load the distance is even shorter),
Set for at least 2" of leveling with a full load and increase P17
to help with full load down floor approach.

I-2/I-3 Valve Reference Reference Section
I-2®/I-3® Valve Quick Reference

This section may be used to reset the valve adjustments and start a new, complete valve setup.
Low Pressure Manual Lowering Valve Lowering & FORBIDDEN

Adjustment Leveling
Speed
Adjustment
Up Start
Adjustment
OK
Up Leveling
Adjustment
Down Slowdown
Adjustment
High Pressure
Relief Adjustment REFERENCE INFORMATION
Down Stop The closer the flats on the lowering
Adjustment
& leveling screw get to perpendicular
with the axis of the tank return line,
Down Start
the more likely the valve will lock
Up Stop Up Slowdown up in the down direction.
Adjustment
Adjustment Adjustment
NOTES ADJ. NAME PRELIMINARY SETTINGS
1. Make adjustments with the car empty. RELIEF Appx. з" out
2. Ensure system has at least 90 PSI static Turn CCW until screw disengages from piston, then CW
pressure before adjusting. LOW PRESSURE until resistance is felt, turn CCW an additional 3 turns
3. Do not adjust the valve unless oil
UP LEVELING Turn CCW until the screw stops, then CW 2 turns
temperature is between 80° - 110° F.
4. Do not attempt to adjust the Lowering and UP STOP Turn CW until the screw stops, then CCW 2 turns
Leveling Screw unless the car is moving
UP SLOWDOWN Turn CW until the screw stops, then CCW 4 turns
or resting on the buffer stands with
pressure off the lowering piston, or valve UP START Turn CW until the screw stops, then CCW 3 turns
damage may result. DOWN START Turn CW until the screw stops, then CCW 6 & one-half turns
5. Leveling speed and zone adjustments are
DOWN STOP Turn CW until the screw stops, then CCW 6 turns
sensitive and may require multiple attempts.
DOWN
6. After completing final adjustments, Turn CW until screw stops, then CCW 5 & three-eighths turns
SLOWDOWN
bleed the car down slightly with the
LOWERING &
manual lowering valve to see if it levels Turn CW until the screw stops, then CCW 3 turns
LEVELING
back up with the floor. If not, the slowdown
MANUAL
adjustments need to be rechecked. Turn CW until the screw stops (closed)
LOWERING
ADJ. NAME PRELIMINARY ADJUSTMENTS

Make this adjustment before any other! Disconnect both UP solenoids (disconnect CON15 on IOF) and activate
the pump (the car should not move at this point). SLOWLY turn the Low Pressure screw CW until the car begins
LOW to move, then CCW until it just stops. For 95 GPM pumps and lower, turn CCW an additional one-quarter turn.
PRESSURE For over 95 GPM pumps, turn CCW an additional one-half turn. Turn off the pump, tighten lock nut, and reconnect
both solenoids. No further adjustment is necessary on Low Pressure. Turning CW closes the regulator piston.
Never operate above 600 PSI! Open Manual Lowering valve slightly, shut off valve to jack line and run
RELIEF the car up on Machine Room Inspection. Turn Relief screw CW to increase pressure, CCW to reduce
pressure. Close Manual Lowering valve and recheck pressure, adjust Relief screw as necessary.
Stop the run, vent pressure with the Manual Lowering valve, and open the shut off valve.

Reference Section I-2/I-3 Valve Reference
Valve Final Adjustments
This is a quick reference for the I-2/I-3 Valve for use by experienced mechanics.
See the I-2/I-3 Valve component manual for procedure and troubleshooting information.
Typical Performance Curve
Adjustment 2 Adjustment 3
Starting Acceleration Fast Speed
Adjustment 5
Deceleration to Leveling Speed
Adjustment 1
Speed
Adjustment 5
Leveling Zone Deceleration to Full Stop
Set at 3"-4"
Adjustment 4
Leveling Speed
Set at 10-12 FPM
Travel (Up or Down)
Recommended Adjusting Order: Adjustment 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 on DOWN side, then Adjustment 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 on UP side.
Adjustment Effect On Performance

Notes
No. Name CW CCW
Softer stop, firmer Firmer stop, softer
Down Stop Set first then leave alone. Affects other Down adjustments.
start, faster leveling start, slower leveling
1
Softer stop, Firmer stop,
Up Stop Set before Up Start. Too soft will allow car to overshoot.
firmer start softer start
Must be more open (CCW) than Down Stop. Increase
Down Start Softer start More abrupt start
CCW if full speed cannot be achieved on one-floor run.
2
Softer start Must be more open (CCW) than Up Stop. Increase
Up Start More abrupt start
CCW if full speed cannot be achieved on one-floor run.
Lowering & Reduce fast Increase fast
Leveling* Adjust in roughly one-half turn increments.
3 lowering speed lowering speed
Up Fast
REFERENCE
N/A N/A No adjustment. Set by pump capacity.
Lowering & Adjust in less than one-eighth turn increments. Hold screw
Reduce leveling speed Increase leveling speed
Leveling* to tighten locknut so settings don’t change. Very sensitive.
4
Decrease leveling speed,
Up Leveling Increase leveling speed, May affect UP Slowdown.
softer slowdown firmer slowdown
Down Increase leveling zone, Decrease leveling zone, Very sensitive. Must find "sweet spot" of about one-eighth
Slowdown firmer slowdown softer slowdown turn range to affect adjustment. Affects Down Leveling.
5
Up Decrease leveling zone, Increase leveling zone,
Very sensitive. More CCW gives more abrupt slowdown.
softer slowdown, firmer slowdown,
Slowdown
increase leveling speed decrease leveling speed Affects Up Leveling.
* If the valve locks up in the down direction due to the orientation of the flats on the lowering and leveling screw, run the car
up and change the orientation of the screw 90° while the car is moving to restore function.

I-2/I-3 Valve Reference Reference Section
This page
intentionally
left blank.

9280 Crestwyn Hills Memphis, TN 38125
Tel: (866) 448-3789 (toll free) Fax: (901) 877-8099
www.verticalxpress.com
All illustrations and specifications are based on information in effect at time of publication
approval. Vertical Express reserves the right to change specifications or design and to
discontinue items without prior notice or obligation. © 2020 Vertical Express
9280 Crestwyn Hills Memphis, TN 38125
Tel: (866) 448-3789 (toll free) Fax: (901) 877-8099
www.verticalxpress.com
All illustrations and specifications are based on information in effect at time of publication
approval. Vertical Express reserves the right to change specifications or design and to
discontinue items without prior notice or obligation. ©2020 Vertical Express

Tac 32 ICON 32 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tac 32 ICON 32 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tac 32 ICON 32 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Controller

Vertical Express • P.O. Box 2019 • Memphis, Tennessee 38101

©2020 Vertical Express. All rights reserved.

Manual Number: 88500 v.1.0

Vertical Express Product Manual 1-1 88500 v.1.0

©Vertical Express 1-2 Printed in USA April 2020

• Pit template (if provided), pit channel, and buffers

• Car sling and platform

• Power unit and controller

• Fluid line (jack line)

Prepare for Temporary Operation

CON19 CON20 CON21

Figure 1 - IOF Card Connectors

Vertical Express Product Manual 1-3 88600 v.1.0

Prepare for Temporary Operation

High Voltage Wire Routing

HIGH VOLTAGE SIDE LOW VOLTAGE SIDE

Mainline Disconnect Power

Figure 2 - Power from Mainline Disconnect to the Controller

©Vertical Express 1-4 Printed in USA April 2020

Figure 3 - UPS Unit Connections

EPD1 & EPD2

Figure 4 - EPD1/EPD2 Jumpers

Vertical Express Product Manual 1-5 88600 v.1.0

TR4 (WHT) 9:4 18:5

MCC2 ADD WHEN

DSS1 DOWN SLOW

©Vertical Express 1-6 Printed in USA April 2020

TR4 (WHT) 9:4 18:2 FROM XFMR1 OR UPS

MCC2 ADD WHEN

(on Across the Line with

DSS1 DOWN SLOW

Vertical Express Product Manual 1-7 88600 v.1.0

Figure 7 - IOF Card (6300AHV001)

4. Turn OFF the mainline disconnect.

5. Install the plug at CON16 on the IOF Card.

©Vertical Express 1-8 Printed in USA April 2020

Figure 8 - RUNBUG Plug at CON9 on the IOF Card

9. Turn ON the mainline disconnect.

10. Confirm that the AC LED is illuminated. See Figure 9.

Figure 9 - Illuminated AC LED on IOF Card

Vertical Express Product Manual 1-9 88600 v.1.0

Electronic Starter Setup

Electronic Starter Display

3. Press  twice to display the PARAMETERS menu.

4. From the PARAMETERS menu, press  once. STARTING AMPS displays.

©Vertical Express 1-10 Printed in USA April 2020

Electronic Starter Setup

7. Press  once to access the value.

8. Press  to exit to the PARAMETERS Menu.

Mechanical Starter Set Up with ESP200 Overloads

Full Load Amps

Figure 10 - ESP200 Overload Adjustment

Motor Motor Voltage NEC Motor NP Wiring Overload

Vertical Express Product Manual 1-11 88600 v.1.0

Mechanical Starter Set Up with ESP200 Overloads

Line or Phase Overload Line or Phase Overload

Table 2 - Overload Specifications For ESP 200 Overload Applications

©Vertical Express 1-12 Printed in USA April 2020

Pump Motor Rotation